JP7782604B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured so that an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the results of the internal lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707

Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention provides
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a first operating means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a second operating means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect to be executed in multiple games when a specific opportunity is established;
a specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect by a predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means;
a specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification when the specific opportunity is established;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a first game corresponding to the execution of an operation of a first mode when an operation of the first mode is executed , and is configured to be capable of executing a second game corresponding to the execution of an operation of a second mode different from the first mode when an operation of the second mode is executed ,
It is possible to set the specific effect to be executed when the specific trigger is established in a situation where the first game is played,
a specifying means for suspending the specific effect being executed in the second game or a game subsequent to the second game when the operation of the second mode is executed during execution of the specific effect;
The specific notification can be executed by a predetermined notification means different from the predetermined performance means,
In a game in which the specific effect is interrupted by the specific means based on the execution of the operation of the second mode during the execution of the specific effect and the specific notification, the specific notification can be continued,
The device is characterized in that after the specific presentation is interrupted and the specific notification is continued, the specific notification can be continued in a game in which the interruption of the specific presentation is released.

This invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when three bets are made. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when two bets are made. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a bonus state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of various transition lottery tables. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a precursory mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a premonition game number table. 10 is a flowchart showing an AT top-up process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification display performed on the auxiliary display unit. A flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing buttons. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the number of games played. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first number-of-games management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second game count management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a third game number management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display on the zone indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a sub-side display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a main premonition effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario data table. This is a flowchart showing the processing for notifying specific roles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-omen effect table. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for waiting for a continuous performance. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing consecutive performances. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. This is a flowchart showing the bonus effect setting process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table according to the second embodiment, and FIGS. 10B and 10C are diagrams showing examples of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing consecutive performances. 10 is a flowchart showing a preliminary performance process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table relating to the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the bonus effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing consecutive performances. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. A flowchart showing the bonus performance setting process related to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario data table. 10A is a flowchart showing the process for executing continuous effects, FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the process for setting effects when all the buttons are stopped, and FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the process for setting continuous effects. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. A flowchart showing the bonus performance setting process related to the fifth embodiment. 10A is a flowchart showing the continuous effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the effect setting process when all the buttons are stopped. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of consecutive performances. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process according to the sixth embodiment. 10A is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing an ending effect execution process. This is a flowchart showing the bonus effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the ending presentation. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the relationship between the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase number of the advantageous zone is reached and the number of games remaining until the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is reached in the seventh embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the bonus effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the ending presentation.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 19 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., the first symbol on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., the zeroth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., the fourteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., the second symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., the eighth symbol on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., the ninth symbol on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., the third symbol on the left reel 32L), "Youth" (e.g., the eighteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" (e.g., the fourth symbol on the left reel 32L), and "White Shell" (e.g., the nineteenth symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three symbol combinations, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, of the visible symbols. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as shown in Figure 7, the combinations of these three symbols include, for example, the combination of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the combination of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 32R, as well as combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-sloping line L5 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 connecting the middle symbol on the left reel 32L, the top symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are straight lines when the symbols are lined up, while the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on curved lines besides the curved line L6, but we will not discuss them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated by betting medals, and some are not. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, the game may start with either three medals bet or two medals bet. When the game starts with either three or two medals bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. Also, hereinafter, a game that starts with three medals bet will be referred to as a three-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet will be referred to as a two-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet will be referred to as a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize wins that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize win through the 32nd small prize win.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line sloping downward to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the second small win is achieved. When the second small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the second small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first small win described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a small win different from the first and second small wins described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the fourth small win is achieved. When the fourth small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the fourth small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in line on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first to third small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 5th small win is achieved. When the 5th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 5th small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 1st to 4th small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols line up.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 6th small win is achieved. When the 6th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small win stops on the pay line ML, "bell" symbols stop (forming a small hill) on the bottom of the left reel 32L, the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the bottom of the right reel 32R. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand, from the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbols, that a small win different from the first to fifth small wins described above has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 7th small win is achieved. When the 7th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh minor win stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops aligned on the downward-sloping line L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 8th small win is achieved. When the 8th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th small win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops in alignment on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 7th small win has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned.

The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are so-called missed combinations, which are mainly awarded when the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations are missed. When the 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are awarded, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are achieved when the corresponding combination of the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol or "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "BAR" symbol or "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor wins are all set so that the "bell" symbols do not stop aligned on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that a minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration where medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned 1st to 32nd small wins, the paid out small wins are a type of bonus awarded depending on the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of inserted (betted) medals may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

Winnings that grant the replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winnings through the 12th replay winnings. As shown in Figure 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay through the 12th replay.

A first replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "white shell" or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a replay win corresponding to the replay has occurred.

A second replay win is achieved when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When a symbol corresponding to a second replay win stops on the active line ML, as shown in Figure 14(a), the "BAR" symbols may stop aligned on the upward-sloping line L5, or as shown in Figure 14(b), the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol may stop on the upward-sloping line L5 in order from left to right. When a second replay win is achieved, the game state does not change, but a transition to a notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the first AT state is initiated.

A third replay win is achieved when the "bell" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When a symbol corresponding to a third replay win stops on the active line ML, as shown in Figure 14(c), "white 7" symbols may stop in a line on the bottom line L3, or as shown in Figure 14(d), "red 7" symbols may stop in a line on the downward-sloping right line L4. When a third replay win is achieved, the game state does not change, but a transition to a notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the second AT state begins.

The fourth and fifth replays are adjustment replays in the event that multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

A sixth replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "BAR," "cherry," "white shell," or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figure 12(d), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in the "tenpai" state. Furthermore, when a symbol corresponding to the sixth replay win stops on the active line ML, a "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the bottom row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

A seventh replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the center reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the center reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in a tenpai state. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

The 8th replay wins when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

A 9th replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 9th replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "replay" symbol does not stop in the middle row of the right reel 32R (instead, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a middle row replay miss.

The 10th replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. The 12th replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 13(c) and 13(d), when a symbol corresponding to a 10th replay win or a 12th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the bottom row of the left reel 32L. If a 10th or 12th replay win has been won, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R, a "cherry" symbol will stop on the top row in the case of a 10th replay win, and a "cherry" symbol will stop on the middle or bottom row in the case of a 12th replay win, making it possible to distinguish between a 10th replay win and a 12th replay win. An 11th replay win is achieved when a 10th or 12th replay win is not possible, i.e., when a miss occurs.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in game state include the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win.

When the "White 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White Shell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 1st BB win is achieved. When a 1st BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st BB state. As shown in Figure 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to a 1st BB win stop on the pay line ML, the "White 7" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a second BB win occurs. When a second BB win occurs, the game state transitions to the second BB state. As shown in Figure 13(f), when the symbols corresponding to a second BB win stop on the pay line ML, a "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (Figure 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main control unit 101, which will be described later. The main control unit 101 then determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when a stop switch 42-44 has not been operated, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a output a LOW detection signal. When a stop switch 42-44 is operated, the detection signal switches from LOW to HIGH. The main control unit 101 detects this signal switch and determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated. When the main control unit 101 determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

In other words, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 operates in mechanical conjunction, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided below and to the left of display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined number of virtual medals, credited as gaming media, out of the game's specified number at one time. The specified number is set depending on the game's progress. For example, if the game's specified number is set to three and the specified number is set to three, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals are inserted, provided that credits are available. If the specified number is set to two and the specified number is set to two, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted, provided that credits are available. Furthermore, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number is set to three or two and the specific number is set to three, three virtual medals are inserted, provided that there are credits available; and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number is set to three or two and the specific number is set to two, two virtual medals are inserted, provided that there are credits available.

Also, a second credit switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit switch 56. The second credit switch 57 is used to insert two virtual medals.

Each credit insertion switch 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitutes input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, each credit insertion switch 56, 57 merely involves the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media. Note that this slot machine 10 does not have a credit insertion switch because it inserts one virtual medal at a time.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that players will normally operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is expected that players will normally insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is a performance switch 66 that is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, a remaining payout number display unit 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display units 60-62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, is an instruction monitor 68 that includes a push order indicator that notifies the player of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and a zone indicator that notifies the player of the operation order, thereby changing the winning rate of minor winning combinations and indicating advantageous zones that allow the player to play in an advantageous situation. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

On the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42-44, there is a lower display unit 69 that displays the gaming machine model name and provides a specified display screen. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as an LCD display unit, or may be provided with operation buttons for presentation purposes, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, hall managers and others can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 77 that indicates the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The role ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control unit 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, but is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. More specifically, it is housed within the board box that houses the main control unit 101 so that the display screen of the role ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is closed, the role ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps in the display windows 26L-26R, and the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be viewed unless the front door 12 is unlocked by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21 and opened. The role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in more detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 15 and 16.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

Connected to the input side of the main control device 101 are various sensors, including the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect operation of each stop switch 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the winning combination monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 contains ROM 105, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and RAM 106, which provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROM 105. As well as these, the CPU 102 also contains various processing circuits (not shown) required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive a backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area as well as memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game statuses such as the BB state.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed during power outage processing (see Figure 17) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 contains a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66). The various display units 60-62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and the normal processing performed in the main processing.

Figure 17 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

The power outage process first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, the process ends, returns to timer interrupt processing, and ends command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer in CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in I/O port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Next, a RAM judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above process, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for a complete power outage that would prevent further processing. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and writing to RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to spin them. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a (see Figure 15), and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract values from each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as lottery result commands (described later), to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, payout number display unit 62, and instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, ending this series of timer interrupt processes.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether any replay wins were achieved in the previous game. If any replay wins were achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Specifically, for example, if a replay win is achieved in a three-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay win is achieved in a two-bet game, a process to automatically insert two virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If no replay win was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading results are normal, a determination is made as to whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, a determination is made as to whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends immediately.

After the start waiting process is completed, step S205 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the bonus state (BB state) is set to "3," and the specified numbers in gaming states other than the bonus state are set to "2" and "3." That is, in the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3," and in a state other than the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2" or "3." In other words, in a gaming state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a medal has been bet but the number of medals is "1," a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which a positive determination was made in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device, in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 of the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving the bet command, the display control device 81 executes processing for notifications based on bet operations (for example, notifications that the game start conditions have been met, or notifications of the lottery results from the previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processing from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured so that play can begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S208, an active line setting process is performed to set the combination of lines corresponding to the number of bets as active lines. In other words, only the bent line L6 is set as an active line. In step S209, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state, prohibiting bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in that order, and the system returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 19.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are broadly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the specified bet numbers are set to "3" and "2" as described above, and therefore the lottery tables for the normal gaming state are set to a lottery table for a 3-bet game and a lottery table for a 2-bet game.

In other words, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the gaming state flags set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and no bonus state flags are set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. If the current game is a three-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state for a three-bet game (Figure 20) is selected, and if the current game is a two-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state for a two-bet game (Figure 21) is selected.

In addition, this slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, as well as performing a specified operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1," the lottery table with the lowest expected value for medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6," the lottery table with the highest expected value for medal payout is selected.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed by the main processing launched by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is launched after the initialization process when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is updated as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1." Each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, operating the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF is considered a confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, thereby terminating the winning probability setting process. Upon completion of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display unit 60 also terminates. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table is selected based on these stored setting values.

The lottery table will now be briefly explained. Figure 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Figure 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. The winning/loss determination for the winning combination is made by determining whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process is executed to set a winning flag for the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined to be positive in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the seventh small winning combination flag and the eighth small winning combination flag are set in step S306. Furthermore, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, the second BB winning flag is set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see step S203 of the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset when the corresponding winning is achieved as one of the conditions. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid across multiple games.

In addition, in step S306, when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is achieved, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is not achieved, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the 1st BB winning flag will not be set. Also, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small win flag, 9th small win flag, 10th small win flag, and 13th small win flag will be set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform the lottery process using this separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is recommended to set the index values IV and point values PV in this separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB and second BB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and the following step S308 determines whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it determines whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the win/loss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV.

By the way, when determining whether a winning combination is achieved using the lottery table shown in Figure 20, that is, when playing a 3-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 27.3 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 with setting 6, with the higher the setting value, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both approximately 1 in 26.2 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning chance eye A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1 in 164 regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning chance eye B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1 in 262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning chance eye C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 1 in 16,400 regardless of the setting value, and the system is set so that chance eye B is easier to win than chance eye C, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is approximately 1 in 107 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 104 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 93.6 with setting 6, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1 in 215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1 in 13,100 regardless of the setting value, so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning a common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 504 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a normal push bell 1, normal push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle normal push bell 1, middle normal push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse pinch bell 2, reverse push bell 1, and reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is approximately 1 in 18.4 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the first BB (the probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1 in 5.03 regardless of the setting value, which is set higher than the probability of winning other roles (replay, small roles, IV = 1 to 24). In a 3-bet game, the system is set so that the overlapping 1-piece role (IV = 24) and the second BB (IV = 26) do not win (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In a 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the first BB, is 0. And when the first BB has been won, the probability of not winning any role in a 3-bet game is approximately 1 in 5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in a 3-bet game, before the first BB win, you can expect a decrease of about 1.50 medals per game (net increase of about minus 1.50 medals), excluding the increase in the first BB state, and in the carryover state after the first BB win, you can expect a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game (net increase of about minus 2.10 medals), excluding the increase in the first BB state.

In contrast, when using the lottery table shown in Figure 21 to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved, i.e., when playing a two-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, Normal Lip C, Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, or Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) is the same as the probability when playing a three-bet game. The probability of winning the Common Bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 9.64 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be easier to win than when playing a three-bet game. The Push Order Bell (IV = 11 to 22) is set to be impossible to win in a two-bet game. The probability of winning the Watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be harder to win than when playing a three-bet game. In a two-bet game, the system is set up so that a double 1-coin role (IV = 24) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 1.81 regardless of the setting value. Also, in a two-bet game, the system is set up so that a first BB (IV = 25) cannot be won, but a second BB (IV = 26) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 4.95 regardless of the setting value. Even in a two-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the second BB, is zero. And, in a situation where the second BB has been won, the probability of not winning any role in a two-bet game is approximately 1 in 4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in a two-bet game, before the second BB is won, you can expect a decrease of approximately 0.24 medals per game (net increase of approximately minus 0.24 medals), excluding the increase from the second BB, and in the carryover state after the second BB is won, you can expect a decrease of approximately 0.64 medals per game (net increase of approximately minus 0.64 medals), excluding the increase during the second BB state.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning combination has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether to execute a freeze effect that disables operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period of time.

The following step S310 performs lottery result response processing. This lottery result response processing involves processing to determine whether or not to transition the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, and processing to notify the player of the push order combination. This lottery result response processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 during the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, if push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11) and the first small combination winning flag, ninth small combination winning flag, tenth small combination winning flag, and thirteenth small combination winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small combination, ninth small combination, tenth small combination, and thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, if a watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the 7th small win flag and the 8th small win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 7th and 8th small wins can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set to be a winning combination only in a three-bet game, and the second BB is set to be a winning combination only in a two-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a two-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a first BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a first BB win is set). Also, even if the second BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a three-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a second BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a second BB win is set).

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set their priorities. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win will be won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if you have won the 1st BB (the 1st BB win flag is set and the 1st BB win has been carried over), and then you win a watermelon, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and the 7th and 8th small wins has been set, the priority will be set so that the 7th and 8th small wins take priority over the 1st BB win. Also, if you have won the 2nd BB (the 2nd BB win flag is set and the 2nd BB win has been carried over), and then you win a regular lip A, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd BB win and the 1st replay, 2nd replay, 3rd replay, and 4th replay wins has been set, the priority will be set so that each replay win takes priority over the 2nd BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combinations are set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed, and no misses will occur. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win, and a bonus win will never be achieved.

After executing the processing of step S313, the number of games update processing is executed in step S314. The number of games update processing updates the number of remaining games in the premonition mode, CZ mode, and AT mode. The number of games update processing will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S315, the first interval display process is executed, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first interval display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 22.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 above. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The spin start process checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels began spinning during the previous game. If not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and performs motor control initialization processing, which sets spin start information in the motor control storage area in RAM 106. By performing this processing, the stepping motor acceleration process is initiated in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning. Therefore, even if a player bets the required number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning. The process then waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning at a predetermined constant speed, and the spin start process ends. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reel that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. If they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the reel rotation. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if a win occurs when IV = 11 to 22, i.e., if the push order bell is won (see Figures 20 and 21), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 17th, 18th, or 21st small win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, and the stop information is set so that the 3rd small win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order middle → left → right. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

A brief explanation of the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R follows. In this slot machine 10, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with a spacing of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of operation of stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that they form a section five symbols or more apart, the player must aim at the symbol and operate stop switches 42-44 to stop the symbol on an active line.

We will explain the example of when the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the 17th small win, the 18th small win, or the 21st small win.

The 17th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. The 18th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "young man" symbol. The 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the spacing between symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any of the 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols will stop on the active line (middle row) regardless of the timing of the operation.

In this slot machine 10, when an operation is performed at a timing when multiple target symbols can be stopped, stop control is performed to stop the symbol with the fewest slipping frames on the pay line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, it is possible for the fourth "red shell" symbol (2-frame slip) which is the 18th minor win symbol and the fifth "replay" symbol (3-frame slip) which is the 21st minor win symbol to stop in the middle row. However, stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the fourth "red shell" symbol (with the fewest slipping frames) stops in the middle row. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor win symbol to be achieved, the 17th and 21st minor win symbols will not be achieved.

If the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th small win symbol can be achieved.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the center reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. The "replay" symbols on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the spacing between each "replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the timing of operation of the center stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the top row of the center reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. These symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "white shell" and "young man" symbols is five symbols or more. In other words, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the 18th minor winning symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol, may or may not be able to stop on the upper row. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is possible to stop them on the upper row, the 18th minor winning symbol will be achieved, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is not possible to stop them on the upper row, a so-called miss will occur.

Here, when the "Red Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the top row of the middle reel 32M, it means that, in addition to the possibility of winning the middle push bell 1 and achieving the 18th small win as described above, it also means that it may win the middle push bell 2 and achieve the 20th small win. In other words, the 20th small win symbol on the middle push bell 2 is the same as the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Furthermore, on the right reel 32R, the 18th small win symbol is the "White Shell" symbol and the "Young Man" symbol, while the 20th small win symbol is the "Red 7" symbol and the "White 7" symbol, which are different. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th and 20th small win symbols are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 18th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 20th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 20th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 18th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether middle push bell 1 or middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M are stopped in a manner that may result in the 18th or 20th small win, it is not possible to aim for this and win.

Next, we will explain an example where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the third small win.

The "Replay" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is positioned on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between each "Replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "Replay" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is arranged so that the spacing between the "bell" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the third minor winning symbols, the "watermelon" and "red shell" symbols, are arranged so that the spacing between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the third minor winning symbol will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

As mentioned above, if the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different operation sequence, depending on the operation timing, a small prize will be won, or none of the small prizes will be won and the win will be missed. Incidentally, if the common bell is won, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, the symbol combination formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether a winning combination has been formed on the active line. If a winning combination has been formed, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the win flag, the slot machine 10 enters an error state and an error notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, bonus state processing is performed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. After the bonus state processing is performed, winning result processing is performed in step S415. The winning result processing involves processing such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. The winning result processing will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S417, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S212.

The medal payout process determines whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small win was achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the 1st replay win through the 12th replay win have been achieved. If none of the replay wins have been achieved, the medal payout process ends. If any of the replay wins have been achieved, the replay setting process is performed to change the play mode to replay mode, and the medal payout process ends. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described earlier, if it is determined that the current play mode is replay mode, the automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, when the credit counter count has not reached its upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count, and the resulting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the credit counter count has reached its upper limit, or if the count reaches its upper limit while adding the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also involves changing the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. If the current game state is BB, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter (described below), and the remaining payout number displayed in the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is set, indicating that either BB has been won. If neither BB win flag is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either BB win flag is set, proceed to step S503.

In step S503, a process is performed in which 3 is input into the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. In other words, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when 3 has been input into the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals will be inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of medals for the game, if the specified number of medals for the game is set to two or three, it is permissible to play a two-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Note that if 3 has already been input into the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the MAX bet counter is set to 2 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB win has been achieved, in step S506, a process is executed to input "46" into the BB counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The BB counter is a counter that determines the upper limit of the payout amount in each BB state. In other words, by inputting "46" into the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out.

In step S507, the first BB win flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB status flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, a positive determination will be made in step S501.

In the following step S509, a process is executed to set the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81. The first BB start command is a command for informing the display control device 81 that the first BB state is about to begin, and upon receiving this first BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that a first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. Furthermore, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 is able to recognize that the first BB state will begin from the next game, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that an effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the specified number of bets is set to 3 in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins for the game described above, and corresponds to the number of coins that can be bet to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L to 32R by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the number of coins that can be bet to start the game). In other words, by transitioning to the first BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the first BB state is executed in a 3-bet game.

The initial values for the specified number of bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started. In this case, it is possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game.

When it is determined in step S505 that a first BB win has not been achieved, it means that a second BB win has been achieved. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511, where the BB counter is entered with "46." That is, the second BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the second BB win flag is cleared, and in step S513, the second BB state flag is set. Then, in step S514, a second BB start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command and is a command for informing the display control device 81 that the second BB state has begun. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform a second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform an effect for the second BB state from the next game onward.

The appearance and content of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect differ to an extent that the player can distinguish them. Furthermore, the appearance and content of the effect for the first BB state and the effect for the second BB state also differ to an extent that the player can distinguish them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

In this embodiment, the BB counter (maximum payout amount) is set to the same value when a first BB win is achieved and when a second BB win is achieved, but these values may also be different. For example, the BB counter value set when a first BB win is achieved may be higher than the value set when a second BB win is achieved, or vice versa.

If step S501 returns a positive result and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515, where processing is performed during the first BB state or the second BB state. Figure 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. Note that in this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables may be provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities for each combination may be different.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is possible to win the normal RIP A, the common bell, and the overlapping 1-coin role. The probability of winning the normal RIP A (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 61.2, the probability of winning the common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 9.02, and the probability of winning the overlapping 1-coin role (the probability of winning when IV = 24) is approximately 1 in 1.78. Furthermore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of a losing result (not winning any role) is approximately 1 in 3.13. In this case, a loss of approximately 0.96 medals is expected per game (net increase minus approximately 0.96 medals). In other words, in the first BB state or the second BB state, the expected value of the total difference in number of medals (the total number of medals paid out in the BB state minus the total number of medals inserted in the BB state) for the period from the start to the end of each BB state will be a negative value, resulting in a decrease in the number of medals held.

Here, in the normal game state in a 3-bet game and the first BB state to which a 3-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase occurs when the first through sixth minor winning combinations, which result in a payout of 13 medals, are won. These combinations are the push order bell in the normal game state and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor winning combinations, assuming that stop switches 42-44 are operated in a fixed order in the normal game state, there is an approximately 1 in 9.19 chance of winning, while in the first BB state the chance is approximately 1 in 9.03. In a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set to be more likely to result in a win than the normal game state.

In addition, in both the normal game state in a two-bet game and the second BB state to which a player can transition in a two-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and while the probability of winning in the normal game state is approximately 1 in 9.64, in the second BB state the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 9.03. Even in a two-bet game, the second BB state is set up so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state.

However, as mentioned above, the first and second BB states use a lottery table in which medals may decrease with each game, so you cannot expect an increase in the number of medals you have even if you complete the first and second BB states. Conversely, it is expected that the number of medals you have will decrease as you complete the first and second BB states.

In the bonus state processing, step S515 determines whether any small winning combination has been achieved in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table described above and the control of each reel. If no winning combination has been achieved, the bonus state processing ends. If a winning combination has been achieved, step S516 executes a process to subtract the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination from the BB counter in the various counter area 106e described above. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516.

If it is determined in step S517 that the count is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count is 0 or less, in step S518, the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is cleared. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the MAX bet counter is entered with 2, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state that will currently end is set as the output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, if the first BB state is to end, the first BB end command is set as the output target, and if the second BB state is to end, the second BB end command is set as the output target. Upon receiving the first BB end command or the second BB end command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65 so that a first BB end effect or a second BB end effect is performed.

Then, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, in the normal game state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game can be played. However, since 2 is input into the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 inserts two virtual medals, and a 2-bet game is played. In other words, when neither the first BB hit flag nor the second BB hit flag is set, the system is set to make it easier to play a 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input into the MAX bet counter, so operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 does not allow a 3-bet game; instead, three medals must be inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 to play a 3-bet game.

Here, we will explain the gameplay of this slot machine 10 using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game, with reference to Figure 26.

In the initial state after RAM 106 has been initialized (cleared), the first BB win flag and second BB win flag are not set, and the game is in a normal game state (non-internal state) where no BB has been won. In this case, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to 2 or 3 coins, making it possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. However, as described above, if 2 is input into the MAX bet counter and game play is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, it will be a 2-bet game.

In a non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, it is possible to win the 1st BB, but not the 2nd BB. Conversely, in a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the 2nd BB, but not the 1st BB. Therefore, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a non-internal state (when 2 is input into the MAX bet counter) and a 2-bet game is played, it is possible to win the 2nd BB.

If you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB but do not win in that winning game, the system will enter a carryover state (internal state) in which the 1st BB or 2nd BB win is carried over. Even in this internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to 2 or 3, making it possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. However, if the MAX bet counter is set to 3 as described above and you operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to start play, it will be a 3-bet game.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, in the internal state where the first BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the first BB win cannot be achieved in a 2-bet game. Also, in the internal state where the second BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the second BB win cannot be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the second BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game. In other words, if the first BB is won in a 3-bet game, the first BB win can be achieved by continuing with the 3-bet game, but if the first BB is won and then the game is switched to a 2-bet game, the first BB win cannot be achieved. Furthermore, if you win the second BB in a two-bet game, you can achieve the second BB win by continuing to play the two-bet game, but if you switch to a three-bet game after winning the second BB, you cannot achieve the second BB win. The first BB and second BB cannot be won twice, and you cannot win the first BB again if you have a first BB win carried over, nor can you win the second BB twice. You cannot win the second BB again if you have a second BB win carried over, nor can you win the first BB twice. In other words, if you win the first BB and play a two-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the first BB win is carried over, and if you win the second BB and play a three-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the second BB win is carried over.

As described above, because the first BB win is only possible in a three-bet game and the second BB win is only possible in a two-bet game, even if a three-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a second BB win is carried over, the second BB win will not be achieved, and even if a two-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a first BB win is carried over, the first BB win will not be achieved. This dramatically simplifies the role configuration and control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where a first BB win or a second BB win is carried over. For example, if a 3-bet game is configured so that a 2nd BB win can be achieved, or a 2-bet game is configured so that a 1st BB win can be achieved, and you want to continue the internal state in which the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win has been carried over, you will need to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing outcome, and for example, in the case of a combination that may result in a miss, you will need to have a different combination win when that miss occurs.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role for increasing medals is the common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role for increasing medals in a two-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role for increasing medals in a three-bet game is the push order bell. For the common bell, any of the first to sixth small roles will be won regardless of the operation sequence or timing of the stop switches 42-44, whereas for the push order bell, the winning small role differs depending on the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, the fluctuation in medal gain or loss due to the operation sequence and timing (mainly the operation sequence) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and the internal state in a three-bet game than in the first BB state and the second BB state. For example, by announcing the operation sequence (Figure 25) resulting in the first to sixth small wins when the push order bell is won, it is possible to switch between an AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists in winning and a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) that does not, and create a state in which medals increase or decrease depending on whether or not the notification (assist) is given.

In a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a two-bet game is played in the non-internal state, and the second BB is won in that two-bet game. When the second BB is won, the game switches to the internal state, and in a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game switches to a three-bet game, and the game continues in a state in which the second BB winning mentioned above cannot be realized. In this case, as described above, in the three-bet game in which the second BB winning has been carried over, the first BB is not won, and the second BB is not won, and generally, the game continues in an internal state in which the second BB winning has been carried over.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB win flag is stored in the normal area of the various flag storage area 106d, while the second BB win flag is stored in the save area of the various flag storage area 106d. The normal area is an area where various general flags, such as win flags for other roles, are stored. The flags stored in the normal area are retained using backup power or other means even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (powered off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the amusement hall closes, the slot machine 10 will start up with the various flags stored in the normal area when the power is turned on the next day. Even if the power is turned on/off with the first BB win flag set, the slot machine 10 will start up with the first BB win flag set. However, if the win probability setting process is started (if the setting is changed) when the slot machine 10 is started up, the normal area is initialized (cleared). Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the 1st BB winning flag is cleared along with the other flags stored in these normal areas.

In contrast, the storage area is an area where only the second BB winning flag is stored. Like the normal area described above, the flags stored in the storage area are not cleared when the power is turned on/off. Furthermore, even when the winning probability setting process is initiated upon startup of the slot machine 10, the storage area is not initialized (is excluded from the initialization process). Therefore, even when the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is not cleared and is retained (saved). In other words, if the winning probability setting process is performed in a first BB winning internal state in which a first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and the machine is started in a non-internal state. On the other hand, if the winning probability setting process is performed in a second BB winning internal state in which a second BB winning flag is stored, the second BB winning flag is not cleared and the machine is started in the second BB winning internal state. By doing this, it is possible to continue playing in an internal state in which the second BB win is carried over, not only when the slot machine 10 is turned on/off, but also when settings are changed.

In this case, in order to play in an internal state in which a second BB win is carried over, all that is required is to play the two-bet game until a second BB win occurs in the slot machine 10 when it is shipped from the factory. Thereafter, that second BB win will be stored and held until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clear process is performed. This makes it possible to optimally play in a state in which a second BB win is carried over.

The following will explain the gameplay, assuming that the second BB win has been carried over, and utilizing notifications (push order notifications) when the push order bell is won during that game (also referred to as normal play in the following explanation).

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 27. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game has been performed, and is a process for performing a lottery for transition to an AT mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process is performed to determine the current game state. More specifically, it is determined whether the current state is either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, or whether the current state is a non-internal state (normal game state) before the 1st BB or 2nd BB win, or an internal state (carryover state) after the 1st BB or 2nd BB win. In the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the specified number of bets is set to 3, while in the non-internal state before the 1st BB or 2nd BB win, or the internal state after the 1st BB or 2nd BB win, the specified number of bets is set to 2 or 3.

In the following step S602, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is a specified number (specific specified number) specified for the state identified in step S601. In this embodiment, the specific specified number for the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3. In this case, the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. Therefore, if it is determined in step S601 that the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, a positive determination is always made in step S602. In contrast, in this embodiment, for states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, the specific specified number is set to 3 out of the specified numbers of 2 and 3. If the number of bets in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state is 3, a positive determination is made in step S602. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S603 onwards is performed. In contrast, if the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result response processing is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a two-bet game, the lottery for transitioning to AT mode from step S603 onwards will not be held, putting the player at a disadvantage. By doing this, the internal state is set to a three-bet game, making it easier to play regular gameplay with the second BB carried over.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602, in step S603, it is determined whether or not a favorable zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding whether or not push order notifications etc. will occur, favorable zones in which push order notifications etc. may occur and normal zones in which they will not occur are set. The favorable zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the current game is in a favorable zone, and is set upon transition to a favorable zone and cleared upon transition to a normal zone.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone. In this case, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 28, the lottery results for the current game are determined in step S701. Then, in step S702, a advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in Figure 30, the advantageous zone transition lottery table sets the transition rate to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) according to the lottery results for each game.

As shown in Figure 30, the triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone are set as normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, processing is performed in step S703 to obtain a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e. This dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined interval, and in step S703, the most recent updated value of that counter is obtained. Then, in step S704, a favorable zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that any trigger role has a 100% chance of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result determined in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is possible to omit processing in steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, then in step S706, a process is executed to set a favorable zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The favorable zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the current game is a game in which the transition lottery to the favorable zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 has been executed, the favorable zone transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous zone flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether an AT mode win flag or an AT mode flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode win flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when transitioning to AT mode. In other words, in step S605, it is determined whether transition to AT mode has already been confirmed or has already been made. If neither flag is set in step S605 and transition to AT mode has not yet been confirmed, AT lottery processing is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if either flag is set in step S605, AT addition processing is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the AT lottery process, first in step S801, the lottery results for this game are determined. In the following step S802, it is determined whether or not a CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The CZ mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that CZ mode is in progress, and is set (stored) when CZ mode begins and cleared when CZ mode ends. In this embodiment, normal mode and CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as advantageous zones that exist before winning the lottery to transition to AT mode, and CZ mode is set as a mode in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to AT mode than normal mode.

If it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is not stored, i.e., if the mode is normal, then in step S803, a normal AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the normal AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in Figure 30, the transition rate to AT mode (probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery results of each game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is stored, i.e., if the game is in CZ mode, then in step S804, an AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, the transition rate to AT mode is also set according to the lottery results of each game, as shown in FIG. 30.

In this embodiment, in both the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ mode AT mode transition lottery table, the trigger roles for the AT mode transition lottery are set as normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal mode and CZ mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as trigger roles for the AT mode transition lottery. However, in the CZ AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition rate when chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, or watermelon is won is higher than in the normal AT mode transition lottery table, and the transition rate to AT mode is favored.

Note that the trigger role for the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and may be configured to trigger only certain results that can be won in normal mode and CZ mode play as a 3-bet game carrying over the second BB, such as the AT mode transition lottery being executed only when certain chance symbols are won.

After step S803 or step S804 is executed, the process proceeds to step S805, where AT mode lottery processing is executed. In the AT mode lottery processing, a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is acquired, and a lottery for the AT mode transition lottery is executed using the acquired random number, the lottery result determined in step S801, and the AT mode transition lottery table acquired in step S803 or step S804. In the following step S806, it is determined whether or not the transition to AT mode was won in the AT mode lottery processing of step S805. If the transition to AT mode was won, the AT mode winning processing of steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if the transition to AT mode was not won, the AT mode non-winning processing of steps S811 to S822 is executed.

Here, AT mode is a mode in which push order notifications corresponding to the first through sixth minor roles are generated when the push order bell is won, and is a mode in which many medals can be expected to be added. When the push order notification is generated upon switching to AT mode, it becomes possible to achieve the first through sixth minor roles when each push order bell is won. In this embodiment, the net increase in coins per game in AT mode is approximately 8.04 coins. In AT mode, the initial number of games is 50, and the number of remaining games is increased by winning the additional lottery. Furthermore, the probability of winning the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches 0, the AT mode ends.

If it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, step S807 determines whether a CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106, i.e., whether the game is currently in CZ mode. If the game is not currently in CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S808, where the premonition mode setting process is executed. Premonition mode is a mode in which a winning indication effect suggesting a win in CZ mode, AT mode, or the additional number of games in AT mode is more likely to occur. A winning notification of winning CZ mode, AT mode, or the additional number of games in AT mode is issued after each game in the premonition mode. In other words, when the number of premonition games is set and the game transition to premonition mode is initiated, a notification of winning CZ mode, AT mode, or the additional number of games in AT mode is suspended until the set number of games is played. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, transition to CZ mode or AT mode, or the additional number of games in AT mode, is not implemented immediately after winning the CZ mode transition lottery, but rather after the premonition mode has ended. In other words, transition to CZ mode, etc., is also suspended in the premonition mode. In this sense, the period from when the mode transitions to when it ends can be considered a waiting period during which a win notification and transition to CZ mode are awaited.

In the premonition mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 31, first, in step S901, a premonition game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In the premonition game number table in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 32, the selectable premonition game number (number of continuing games in premonition mode) is set to 5 to 32 games, and the selection probability for each game number is set to differ depending on the current game mode (normal mode or AT mode).

Specifically, if the CZ mode transition lottery is won during normal mode, 5 games are selected with a 10% probability, 6 to 10 games with a 30% probability, and 11 to 20 games with a 60% probability. Also, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during normal mode, 6 to 10 games are selected with a 10% probability, 11 to 20 games with a 30% probability, and 21 to 32 games with a 60% probability. Also, if the AT mode game count increase lottery is won during AT mode, 5 games are selected with a 100% probability. Note that these premonition game counts are merely examples, and the length of the premonition game count and the selection probability can be set as desired.

After obtaining the premonition game number table in step S901, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is executed in step S902. In the lottery process for the number of premonition modes, the number of premonition games for the current premonition mode is drawn by lottery based on the obtained premonition game number table and the lottery counter obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In the following step S903, a process is executed to set (input) the number of premonition games into the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The premonition counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games remaining in the premonition mode, and is decremented by one for each game played.

In step S904, a premonition mode flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The premonition mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the premonition mode is in progress. It is set when the premonition mode begins and cleared when the premonition mode ends. After step S904 is executed, in step S905, a premonition start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the premonition mode setting process ends. The premonition start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the premonition mode has been entered. The premonition start command includes information indicating that the premonition mode has been entered, as well as information indicating the value of the premonition counter (number of premonition games) set in step S903. Therefore, by receiving the premonition start command, the display control device 81 can not only know that the premonition mode has been entered, but also know the number of premonition games at that time, and ultimately know how many games after which a notification of a win in CZ mode, AT mode, etc. should be made.

Returning to the explanation of the AT lottery process (Figure 29), after step S808 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step S807 (if the game is in CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S809, where an AT mode winning flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the game has been won in AT mode.

Note that while in CZ mode, the premonition mode setting process of step S808 is not executed, and transition to premonition mode or the number of premonition games is not set. However, if a transition to AT mode is won during CZ mode, a winning notification is issued when CZ mode ends. In other words, if a transition to AT mode is won during CZ mode, a notification of winning the transition to AT mode is put on hold until the number of CZ games set as the number of CZ mode continuation games has been played. Also, as will be described in more detail below, if a transition to AT mode is won during CZ mode, the transition to AT mode does not occur immediately after the transition lottery is won, but rather waits until CZ mode ends. In other words, the transition to AT mode is also put on hold by CZ mode. In this sense, the duration (execution period) of CZ mode can be said to be the waiting period for a winning notification and transition to AT mode.

After step S809 is executed, in step S810, an AT winning command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The AT winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

If a negative judgment is made in step S806 (if it is determined that the AT mode has not been entered), the process proceeds to step S811, where it is determined whether a CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If the CZ mode flag is not stored, i.e., if the game is in normal mode, a CZ mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S812. As shown in FIG. 30, the CZ mode transition lottery table sets the transition rate to CZ mode (the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery) according to the lottery results of each game. In this embodiment, the triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery are normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery.

Note that the trigger role for the CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and may be configured to trigger only some of the results that can be won in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, such as for example, the AT mode transition lottery being executed only when some of the chance symbols are won.

After the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S812, a CZ mode transition lottery is executed in step S813. In the CZ mode transition lottery, a lottery for whether to transition to CZ mode is performed is conducted based on the acquired CZ mode transition lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In the following step S814, it is determined whether or not the transition to CZ mode has been successful in the CZ mode lottery process of step S813.

If it is determined in step S814 that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S815, where premonition mode setting processing is executed. This processing is similar to the premonition mode setting processing in step S808 above, and performs lottery processing for the number of premonition games, sets the premonition counter, sets the premonition mode flag, and sets the premonition start command according to the flowchart in Figure 31.

After execution of step S815, in step S816, a CZ mode winning flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The CZ mode winning flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In the following step S817, a CZ winning command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The CZ winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

If a positive judgment is made in step S811 above (if the game is in CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S818, where a CZ mode game count increase lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In the CZ mode game count increase lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability of winning the CZ mode game count increase lottery is set according to the lottery results of each game. In this embodiment, the trigger roles for the increase lottery are set to normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as trigger roles for the increase lottery.

Note that the trigger role for adding to the number of games in CZ mode is not limited to the above, and may be configured to trigger only certain results that can be won in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, such as a lottery to transition to AT mode being executed only when certain chance symbols are won.

After the CZ mode game count increase lottery table is acquired in step S818, a CZ mode game count increase lottery is executed in step S819. In this increase lottery, a lottery for an increase in the number of CZ mode games is executed based on the acquired CZ mode game count increase lottery table and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In the following step S820, it is determined whether or not the player has won the CZ mode game count increase lottery in step S819.

If it is determined that the additional number of games has not been won, the AT lottery process is terminated. However, if it is determined that the additional number of games has been won, the process proceeds to step S824, where a process is executed to add a predetermined value (e.g., a value equivalent to 10) to the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The CZ counter is a counter that the CPU 102 uses to keep track of the number of games remaining in CZ mode, and by executing the process of this step, the number of games remaining in CZ mode is increased (added) by a predetermined value (e.g., 10 games). Note that the number of games added in CZ mode does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games; for example, multiple numbers of games may be selected by a lottery for the number of games added.

In the following step S822, a CZ addition command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The CZ addition command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the player has won the number of games to be added in CZ mode. The CZ addition command includes information indicating that the player has won the number of games to be added, as well as information indicating the number of games to be added. Therefore, by receiving the CZ addition command, the display control device 81 can determine that the player has won the number of games to be added lottery, the number of games to be added, and the number of games remaining in CZ mode.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 33. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when the AT mode hit flag or the AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding to the number of continuing games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1001, the lottery result for the current game is determined. In the following step S1002, it is determined whether an AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If an AT mode winning flag is stored, i.e., if the AT mode is in a winning state, the process proceeds to step S1003, where it is determined whether a first AT notification flag or a second AT notification flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, the AT modes are set to a first AT mode and a second AT mode, which have different add-on performance during the AT mode (probability of winning the add-on lottery), and each AT mode is configured to be transitioned when a predetermined symbol combination (transition result) is displayed stationary in the display windows 26L to 26R. The first AT notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that a push order notification should be executed to statically display the transition results for the first AT, and the second AT notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that a push order notification should be executed to statically display the transition results for the second AT. The first AT notification flag or second AT notification flag is set when the precursor mode ends, and is cleared when transitioning to the first AT mode or the second AT mode.

If the determination in step S1003 is negative, i.e., if the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d but neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is stored, this means that the AT mode has been won and the game is currently in premonition mode. In this case, the program proceeds to step S1004, where the process executes a process to obtain the post-win, pre-win notification bonus lottery table from the various table storage area 105a in the ROM 105.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1003 is affirmative, that is, if the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d and either the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is stored, this means that the premonition mode that occurred when the AT mode was won has ended, but the transition to the first AT mode or the second AT mode has not yet occurred. In this case, proceed to step S1005, and execute a process to obtain the post-win notification pre-transition additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105.

As shown in Figure 34, when comparing the post-win, pre-win notification additional lottery table with the post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table, the additional lottery using the post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table is set up so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery using the post-win notification, pre-win notification additional lottery table. More specifically, for example, in an additional lottery triggered by chance eye B, the additional lottery using the post-win, pre-win notification additional lottery table has a 5% chance of winning, while the additional lottery using the post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table has a 7% chance of winning. In other words, in the situation before transitioning to AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after a win is notified than before the AT mode win is notified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002 (the AT mode selection flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1006, where it is determined whether a first AT flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode is in effect. In this embodiment, when transitioning to the first AT mode, the AT mode selection flag, first AT notification flag, and second AT notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 106d are cleared, and the first AT flag is stored. Therefore, a negative judgment in step S1002 means that the system has transitioned to either the first AT mode or the second AT mode.

If it is determined in step S1006 that the first AT flag is stored (if the first AT mode is in effect), then in step S1007, the first AT add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1007 that the first AT flag is not stored, this means that the second AT mode is in effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1008, where the second AT add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105.

As shown in Figure 34, when comparing the first AT add-on lottery table and the second AT add-on lottery table, the add-on lottery using the second AT add-on lottery table is set up so that it is easier to win the add-on lottery than the add-on lottery using the first AT add-on lottery table. More specifically, for example, in an add-on lottery triggered by Cherry B, the add-on lottery using the first AT add-on lottery table has a 10% chance of winning, while the add-on lottery using the second AT add-on lottery table has a 20% chance of winning. After transitioning to AT mode, it is easier to win the add-on lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After the add-on lottery table is obtained in any of steps S1004, S1005, S1007, and S1008, an add-on lottery is executed in step S1009. Then, in step S1010, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If the add-on lottery has not been won, the AT add-on processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery is won, an AT additional win flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 in step S1011. The AT additional win flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that an additional number of games to be played in AT mode has been won. In the following step S1012, the premonition mode setting process is executed, and then the AT additional win process is terminated. The process of step S1012 is the same as the premonition mode setting process in step S808 of Figure 29, and performs the lottery process for the number of premonition games, sets the premonition counter, sets the premonition mode flag, and sets the premonition start command according to the flowchart of Figure 31.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (Figure 27), after executing the processing of step S606 or step S607, step S608 determines whether the lottery result for this game was a push order combination win. A push order combination is a result that includes the push order bell, as well as normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C. Normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C are all results that can be won in multiple replays, and the replay that results in a winning combination can vary depending on the operation order of stop switches 42-44.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 35, in normal replay A, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are basically stopped so that the first replay win is achieved. In contrast, in normal replay B and normal replay C, if the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the second replay win or the third replay win is achieved, and if the left stop switch 42 or the center stop switch 43 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the first replay win is achieved.

However, for Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, and Normal Lip C, regardless of which of the overlapping replay wins is achieved, the bonus awarded is a replay; only the type of replay that is achieved differs. In other words, for Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, and Normal Lip C, a replay win is achieved regardless of the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, but the game results will differ depending on the order in which they are operated.

In particular, normal lip B and normal lip C act as triggers for starting the AT mode. After the AT mode winning flag is set and a notification is made that a situation is likely where a transition to AT mode may occur, the first AT mode is started in a game where a second replay win may occur; after the AT mode winning flag is set and a notification is made that a situation is likely where a transition to AT mode may occur, the second AT mode is started in a game where a third replay win may occur. In other words, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode or second AT mode will not start until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and even after the above notification is executed, the first AT mode or second AT mode will not start until a game is reached where a second replay win or third replay win may occur.

If it is determined in step S608 that a push order role has been won, it is determined in step S609 whether any of the CZ mode flags, AT mode win flags, or AT mode flags are set. If any of these flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result response process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result response process is terminated.

<Outline of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the push order notification process executed in step S610, an overview of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained. Note that the push order notification and push order notification effect can also be referred to as push order navigation, sequence notification, or mode notification, for example. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control unit 101. In contrast, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the push order notification effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 36. Figure 36(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 36(b) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display mode and display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in Figure 36(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has its own light source made up of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to individually display predetermined symbols (including letters and numbers). Note that since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on all of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1-N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" through "6." The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right corner of the area where the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are located. Therefore, the indicator monitor 68 can at least display "1" through "6," "1." through "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as the indicator monitor 68 can individually display multiple patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1-N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight, or even nine segments, is also possible. Furthermore, it is not necessary for each display segment N1-N8 to display the same color; the color displayed by each display segment N1-N8 can be changed as needed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to control the on/off of each display segment N1-N8 by turning the light source on and off; as long as the display can be individually controlled for each display segment N1-N8, the segment display can be constructed using a single backlight and LCD display. Furthermore, rather than applying a segment display to each display area, symbols can be displayed using other types of display devices, such as an LCD display, organic EL display, CRT, or dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the player of the operation sequence of the push-order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(b), if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "left" → "center" → "right," the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 will light up to display "1." Furthermore, if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "right" → "left" → "center," the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 will light up to display "5." In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 lights up in the game in which the start conditions are met, including notification conditions that cause a transition to the advantageous zone and the possibility of a push order notification. It also turns off when the AT mode ends and the game transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and other indicators is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner. The eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, or during non-specific zones that are advantageous zones but are not specific zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 as a push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, is located near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 through 44, which are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is not located on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the positions where the stop switches 42 through 44 are located. This prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being obscured by the hands operating the stop switches 42 through 44, and it can be said that it is located in a position that is easy for players to see. Furthermore, because it is located near the payout number display unit 62, which is easily visible to players who are playing the game in an effort to win medals, it can be said that players are less likely to miss it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED of the eighth display segment N8 on the instruction monitor 68 is set so that it is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display elements (e.g., the payout number display element 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display elements are both controlled to emit light (i.e., lit), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The brightness of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher brightness toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display elements (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, reducing the likelihood of missing it when it is lit.

Next, the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 37. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using the example of a case where the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in Figure 37(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (in the illustration, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Furthermore, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning combination for the current game and that the first stop switch that should be operated is the middle stop switch 43. Furthermore, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3, indicating that the next stop switch that should be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch that should be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When a player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in Figure 37 (b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in Figure 37 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the timing of the push order notification, the notification is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42-44, from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R begins, through an acceleration period, and up to a constant speed rotation. By configuring the notification to be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 before operating them as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Push order notification processing>
Next, the push order notification process executed in step S610 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 38.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S1102 whether the AT mode winning flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set and the AT mode winning flag is set, this means that the transition to AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode winning. In this case, in step S1103, it is determined whether the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT mode winning flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, this means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the player is still in premonition mode. In this case, no push order notification is generated in this game, and the push order notification processing is terminated. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, proceed to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is normal reply B or normal reply C. If it is not normal reply B or normal reply C, but normal reply A or the push order bell, the actual push order notification process is terminated. If it is either normal reply B or normal reply C, it is determined in step S1105 whether it is normal reply B. If it is normal reply B, it is determined in step S1106 whether the above-mentioned first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the actual push order notification process is terminated. If normal reply B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, proceed to step S1107 and execute processing to start the first AT mode.

That is, in step S1107, the flag for the first AT notification is cleared. Then, in step S1108, a flag for starting the first AT is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The flag for starting the first AT is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that the first AT mode will start from the current game. Then, in step S1009, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that a push order notification corresponding to the second replay win is made. Then, in step S1110, a process is executed to set a push order command including information on the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. When the display control device 81 receives this push order command, it displays a push order notification corresponding to the second replay win, such as the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, a display or voice guidance such as "Aim from the right!!", and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player of the symbol corresponding to the second replay win.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the selected button is normal lip C and not normal lip B, the process proceeds to step S1111. In step S1111, it is determined whether the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set and not the second AT notification flag, the main push order notification process ends. If normal lip C is selected and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1112, and processing is performed to start the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1112, the flag for the second AT notification is cleared. Then, in step S1113, a flag for starting the second AT is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The flag for starting the second AT is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that the second AT mode will start from the current game. Then, in step S1114, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that a push order notification corresponding to the third replay win is made. Then, in step S1115, a process is executed to set a push order command including information on the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. When the display control device 81 receives this push order command, it displays a push order notification corresponding to the third replay win, such as the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, a display or voice guidance such as "Aim from the right!!", and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player of the symbol corresponding to the third replay win.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the CZ mode flag is set, or if the AT mode winning flag is not set and the AT mode is already in effect in step S1102, proceed to step S1116. In step S1116, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a push order bell. If it is not a push order bell, the push order notification process is terminated. If it is a push order bell, it is determined in step S1117 whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1118 whether an already-announced flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The already-announced flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that a push order notification has already been made when the push order bell is won in CZ mode, and is a flag that is cleared when CZ mode ends (including when transitioning to AT mode). If the already-announced flag is set, the push order notification process is terminated. If the notification flag is not set, step S1119 executes the process of setting the notification flag.

If the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag in step S1117, or after executing the processing of step S1119, in step S1120, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are made according to the type of push order bell. Then, in step S1121, a push order command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth small wins is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. Upon receiving this push order command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are made.

<Game count update process>
Next, the number of games to be played update process in step S314 in the lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 39. In the number of games to be played update process, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode, the number of games remaining in the CZ mode, and the number of games remaining in the AT mode are updated.

In the game count update process, first, in step S1201, a process is performed to determine the current game state. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is the internal state after the first BB win, the internal state after the second BB win, the non-internal state before the first BB win, the non-internal state before the second BB win, the first BB state, or the second BB state.

In the following step S1202, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game corresponds to the current gaming state, i.e., whether it matches the number of bets set as the specific specified number for the current gaming state. As already explained, in this embodiment, the specific specified number is set to 3 for all of the above states, and in this step it is determined whether the current game was started with a bet of 3. For example, if the game was started with a bet of 3 in the internal state after the second BB win, this step is determined to be positive, and if the game was started with a bet of 2, this step is determined to be negative. If the determination in step S1202 is negative, the number of games update process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1202, i.e., if the current game has started with the specified number of bets (3), the process proceeds to step S1203, where it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored (if the game is in the BB state), the number of games updated process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if the device is not in the BB state), the process proceeds to step S1204, where it is determined whether a precursor mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the precursor mode flag is a flag that indicates that the device is in precursor mode.

If the premonition mode flag is stored (if the game is in premonition mode), step S1205 executes a process to decrement the value of the premonition counter by 1. This updates the number of games remaining in premonition mode. Note that the game count update process is executed when the game starts, so in this embodiment, the number of games remaining in premonition mode is updated when the game starts.

After execution of step S1205, in step S1206, a premonition game count update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The premonition game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games remaining in the premonition mode has been updated. By receiving the premonition game count update command, the display control device 81 is able to understand that the number of games remaining in the premonition mode has been updated by the main control device 101.

After step S1206 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1204 (if the camera is not in premonition mode), step S1207 determines whether a CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the CZ mode flag is a flag that indicates that the camera is in CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is stored (if CZ mode is in progress), step S1208 executes a process to subtract 1 from the value of the CZ counter. This updates the number of games remaining in CZ mode. In the following step S1209, a CZ game count update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games remaining in CZ mode has been updated.

After step S1209 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1207 (if the camera is not in CZ mode), step S1210 determines whether an AT mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the AT mode flag is a flag that indicates that the camera is in AT mode.

If the AT mode flag is stored (if AT mode is in progress), step S1211 executes a process to subtract 1 from the value of the AT counter. This updates the number of games remaining in AT mode. In the following step S1212, an AT game count update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The AT game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games remaining in AT mode has been updated. After step S1212 is completed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1210 (if not in AT mode), this game count update process is terminated.

In this embodiment, if a negative judgment is made in step S1202 (if the number of bets does not match the specific specified number corresponding to the current game state (if the game is started with the number of bets set to 2)), steps S1203 to S1212 are skipped and the number of remaining games in premonition mode or CZ mode is not updated. The duration of premonition mode or CZ mode functions as a waiting period for a winning notification, etc., and if the number of remaining games in each mode is not updated, the end game of each mode will be postponed accordingly. In other words, the waiting period is extended.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result response process performed in step S415 of the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 40. In the winning result response process, processing is performed to start or end the CZ mode, AT mode, etc., depending on the game results. Note that this process is executed when it is determined that all reels 32L to 32R have stopped (when the game has ended).

First, in step S1301, a process is performed to grasp the current game state, and in step S1302, a determination is made as to whether the number of bets for the current game is the specific prescribed number defined in the state grasped in step S1301. These processes are similar to steps S601 and S602 in FIG. 27 and steps S1201 and S1202 in FIG. 39. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, that is, if the number of bets does not match the specific prescribed number corresponding to the current game state (if the game was played with the number of bets set to 2), the winning result response process is terminated without performing the processes from step S1303 onwards.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1302, that is, if the number of bets matches the specific specified number corresponding to the current gaming state (if the game was played with a bet of 3), the process proceeds to step S1303, where the first number of games managed is executed. The first number of games managed process includes terminating the premonition mode and executing processing to notify the player of a win if a transition to AT mode is won during normal mode.

In the first number-of-games-played management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. If neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in BB state), the process proceeds to step S1402, where it is determined whether a CZ mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d. If a CZ mode flag is not stored (if not in CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1403, where it is determined whether a premonition mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d.

If the premonition mode flag is stored (if premonition mode is in progress), proceed to step S1404 and determine whether the value of the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 0. If the value of the premonition counter is not 0, i.e., if the number of games remaining in premonition mode is 1 or more, then this first game count management process is terminated to continue premonition mode.

On the other hand, if the value of the premonition counter is 0 (the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1405, where the premonition mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared (erased). This ends the premonition mode. In the following step S1406, a premonition end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The premonition end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the premonition mode has ended.

After step S1406 is executed, step S1407 determines whether an AT mode win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode win flag is set when a transition to AT mode is selected.

If the AT mode win flag is stored, this means that the premonition mode, which was executed as a result of winning the AT mode during normal mode, has ended. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1408, where an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type will be the first AT mode or the second AT mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, multiple types of AT modes are set: the first AT mode and the second AT mode, which has more favorable add-on performance than the first AT mode. In the AT type determination process, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery, for example, based on the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals added during the advantageous zone, the number of games played during the advantageous zone, etc., or randomly.

In step S1409, it is determined whether the first AT mode has been selected based on the processing result of step S1408. If the first AT mode has been selected, in step S1410 a notification flag for the first AT is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d, and then in step S1411 a first AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. By setting the notification flag for the first AT, processing is performed in the push order notification process (Figure 38) to generate a push order notification for the second replay win. In addition, the first AT winning notification command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that a win has been won to transition to the first AT mode, and that a notification of this win should be issued.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1409 (if the transition to the second AT mode has been won), a second AT notification flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1412, and then a second AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1413. By setting the second AT notification flag, processing is performed in the push order notification process (Figure 38) to generate a push order notification for the third re-play win. In addition, the second AT winning notification command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that the transition to the second AT mode has been won and that a notification of this win should be issued.

After executing step S1411 or step S1413, if a positive judgment is made in step S1401 (if in BB state), a positive judgment is made in step S1402 (if in CZ mode), or a negative judgment is made in step S1403 (if not in premonition mode), this first game count management process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1407 above (if the terminated premonition mode was not triggered by winning the AT mode during normal mode), the process proceeds to step S1414, where it is determined whether an AT addition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The AT addition flag is set when an additional number of games is won during AT mode, and this step determines whether the premonition mode terminated in step S1406 above was triggered by winning the additional number of games during AT mode.

In this embodiment, the circumstances under which a transition to premonition mode occurs include when a transition to CZ mode is won during normal mode, when a win to add the number of games during AT mode is won, and when a transition to CZ mode is won during normal mode. In these cases, while the CZ mode win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d, neither the AT mode win flag nor the AT add-on flag is stored, resulting in a negative determination in both step S1407 and step S1414.

If it is determined in step S1414 that the AT additional win flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1415, where the AT additional win flag is cleared (erased). In the following step S1416, a lottery process for determining the number of additional games is executed. In the lottery process for determining the number of additional games, an additional game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and the number of additional games to be played this time is determined by lottery.

As shown in Figure 34, the number of added games table is set so that the number of added games varies depending on the lottery result of the game that triggers the addition. For example, when the addition is triggered by a normal lip A, an average of 150 games are added, while when the addition is triggered by a cherry A, an average of 15 games are added. In other words, the number of added games is set to be greater when the addition is triggered by an opportunity that is less likely to result in a win in the add-on lottery.

After executing the additional game number lottery process in step S1416, in step S1417, a process is executed to add the current additional game number to the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the AT mode. In the following step S1418, an AT additional command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The AT additional command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that an additional game number in the AT mode has been won. The AT additional command includes information indicating that the above-mentioned game number additional lottery has been won, as well as information indicating the number of additional games. Therefore, by receiving the AT additional command, the display control device 81 can grasp that an additional game number has been won, the number of additional games, and the number of games remaining in the AT mode. After executing step S1418 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1414, this first game number management process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result response process (Figure 40), after executing the first number of games management process in step S1303, the second number of games management process is executed in step S1304. The second number of games management process controls the start and end of CZ mode, and executes processes such as notifying a winning result if a transition to AT mode is won during CZ mode.

In the second number-of-games management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. If neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in BB state), the process proceeds to step S1502, where it is determined whether or not a premonition mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d. If no premonition mode flag is stored (if not in premonition mode), the process proceeds to step S1503, where it is determined whether or not a CZ mode win flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d. The CZ mode win flag is set when a win occurs in transitioning to CZ mode.

If it is determined that the CZ mode win flag has been stored, the CZ mode win flag is cleared (erased) in step S1504. Next, in step S1505, the CZ mode flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d. This starts CZ mode (transition to CZ mode). In the following step S1505, a process is executed to set (input) a predetermined value (e.g., a value equivalent to 10 games) as the initial value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The CZ counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games remaining in CZ mode, and is decremented by one for each game. Note that the initial value of the CZ counter (initial number of games in CZ mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games; for example, multiple numbers of games may be selected by lottery for the number of additional games.

Then, in step S1507, a CZ start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that a transition to CZ mode has occurred. The CZ start command includes information indicating a transition to CZ mode, as well as information indicating the initial number of games in CZ mode. Therefore, by receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 can determine that a transition to CZ mode has occurred and the number of games to continue in CZ mode. After executing step S1507, if a positive judgment is made in step S1501 (if the game is in BB state) or if a positive judgment is made in step S1502 (if the game is in premonition mode), this second game number management process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503 (the CZ mode win flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1508, where it is determined whether or not a CZ mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 106d. If a CZ mode flag is stored (if CZ mode is in progress), it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e is 0.

If the value of the CZ counter is 0 (the number of games remaining in CZ mode is 0), proceed to step S1510 and clear (erase) the CZ mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 106d. This ends CZ mode. In the following step S1511, a CZ end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that CZ mode has ended.

After executing step S1511, in step S1512, it is determined whether or not an AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. If an AT mode winning flag is stored, i.e., if a transition to AT mode has been won during CZ mode, an AT type determination process is executed in step S1513, and it is determined in step S1514 whether or not a transition to the first AT mode has been won. If a transition to the first AT mode has been won, the process proceeds to step S1515, where a first AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the following step S1516, a first AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1514 (if the transition to the second AT mode has been selected), the process proceeds to step S1517, where a second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S1518, a second AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

After executing step S1516 or step S1518, if a negative judgment is made in step S1508 (if not in CZ mode), if a negative judgment is made in step S1509 (if the CZ counter value is not 0), or if a negative judgment is made in step S1512 (if the transition to AT mode has not been won during CZ mode), this second game number management process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result response process (Figure 40), after the second game count management process is executed in step S1304, the third game count management process is executed in step S1305 to end the AT mode. Details of the third game count management process will be described later.

After executing the third game count management process in step S1305, step S1306 determines whether the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the first AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which a second replay win is possible when a transition to the first AT mode occurs; more specifically, it is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which normal replay B is won when the first AT notification flag is set. In other words, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result.

If the first AT start flag is set, the first AT start flag is cleared in step S1307, and the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1308. As already explained, when the first AT flag is set, an additional lottery is held using the first AT additional lottery table.

If it is determined in step S1306 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the second AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which a third replay win is possible when a transition to the second AT mode occurs; more specifically, it is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which a normal replay C is won when the second AT notification flag is set. In other words, the second AT start flag is not set based on the winning result.

If the second AT start flag is set, in step S1310, the second AT start flag is cleared, and in step S1311, a process is executed to set the second AT flag in the various flag storage area 106d. If in step S1309 it is determined that the second AT start flag is not set, the winning result response process is terminated. As already explained, when the second AT flag is set, an additional lottery is held using the second AT additional lottery table.

After executing the processing of step S1308 or step S1311, the processing of inputting 50 into the above-mentioned AT counter is executed in step S1312. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and in this embodiment, 50 games is set as the initial number of games in both the first AT mode and the second AT mode. Note that the initial number of games may be different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or may be determined by lottery. In this case, the initial number of games may be more likely to be higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step S1313, a process is executed to clear the AT mode winning flag, and in step S1314, a process is executed to set the AT mode flag. The AT mode flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the AT mode is in progress. Then, in step S1315, a process is executed to set an AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this winning result response process is terminated.

Next, the third game count management process in step S1305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 43. In the third game count management process, processing is executed to end the AT mode.

In the third game count management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in the BB state), the process proceeds to step S1602, where it is determined whether the AT mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d.

If the AT mode flag is stored (if AT mode is in progress), step S1603 determines whether the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 0. If the value of the AT counter is 0 (if the number of games remaining in AT mode is 0), proceed to step S1604, where the AT mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared (erased). This ends the AT mode. Then, in step S1605, an AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The AT end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode has ended.

After executing step S1605, if a positive judgment is made in step S1601 (if the game is in BB state), a negative judgment is made in step S1602 (if the game is not in AT mode), or a negative judgment is made in step S1603 (if the number of games remaining in AT mode is 1 or more), this third game number management process is terminated.

<Management of advantageous zones>
Next, we will explain the first section display process and the second section display process, which are used to control the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transition to a favorable section, and end a favorable section.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 44. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S315 of the lottery process (Fig. 19), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is carried out based on the lottery result.

In step S1701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is currently displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit, it indicates that the zone is a specific zone within the advantageous zone where at least the notification conditions for a push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is currently off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous zone flag is not set, in step S1703, a process is executed to increment the normal counter provided in the various counter area 106e by 1. The normal counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games that have started as a normal zone rather than an advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S1703, it is determined in step S1704 whether the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery processing, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that game as a winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set, processing is executed in step S1705 to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. Then, processing is executed in step S1706 to set the advantageous zone flag.

In step S1707, the number of games played during the advantageous period is counted, and more specifically, processing is performed to start measuring the advantageous period game count AG in the various counter areas 106e. As described above, the advantageous period game count AG corresponds to a means for determining the number of games played during the advantageous period.

After executing the processing for the advantageous zone transition game in step S1708, or if it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous zone flag is set, it is determined in step S1708 whether the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is set. As already explained, in this embodiment, a push order notification can be made when the push order bell is won in AT mode or CZ mode, and a situation in which the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is set can be said to be a situation in which the display start conditions of the zone indicator are met. If either of these flags is set, in step S1709, the display of the zone indicator begins by lighting up the eighth display segment N8.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 is currently being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1710, processing is executed to continue display during the favorable section. Specifically, in step S1710, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 remains lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not executed in this first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous zone flag nor the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, or if the advantageous zone flag or advantageous zone winning game flag is set but the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is not set and normal mode is selected, the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which no push order notification occurs, i.e., the number of games in the normal zone and non-specific zone.

Furthermore, after executing the display start process of the section indicator in step S1709 and the display continuation process in step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, the process adds 1 to the second role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The second role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games at which a push order notification can be generated, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1711 or step S1712, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1713. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games played). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games played. Then, in step S1714, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1713 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment displays consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the winning combination monitor 77 has the following 7-segment displays: a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e. Like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, the display segments in the first display unit 77a through the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows each winning combination monitor 77 to individually display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers), and in particular, the winning combination monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1714, the result of the calculation process in step S1713 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a-77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and with four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the percentage of the total number of games in which a push order notification may occur. After the process of step S1714 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the calculation process in step S1713 may involve rounding off numbers to the fifth decimal point before controlling the display of the winning ratio monitor 77. Furthermore, since the first display unit 77a of the winning ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0," the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It may also be desirable to have a decimal point displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 45. As already explained, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is performed after medal payout (payout determination process) and transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result response process) have been performed at the end of one game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1802, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the advantageous zone game count AG. After the process in step S1802 is executed, in step S1803, a process is executed to update the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter area 106e.

In the MY update process of step S1803, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the result of this subtraction is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, the remaining game count management process is executed in step S1804, and then the remaining coin count management process is executed in the following step S1805.

The remaining game count management process is a process for managing whether the current remaining number of games will cause the advantageous zone to reach its upper limit (1,500 games) based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining game count management process determines, for example, whether the sum of the advantageous zone game count AG (number of games played in the advantageous zone), the AT counter (number of games remaining in AT mode), the CZ counter (number of games remaining in CZ mode), and the premonition counter (number of games remaining in premonition mode) is greater than or equal to the upper limit of games in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a first excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify the situation.

The remaining coin management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit increase (2,400 coins) with the current remaining number of games, based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. The remaining payout coin management process determines, for example, whether the sum of the expected increase calculated from the AT counter and the average increase per game in AT mode, and the current increase/decrease in the advantageous zone MY is greater than the increase/decrease in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify the situation.

Then, in step S1806, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of coins in the advantageous zone increase/decrease MY has reached the upper limit of 2400. If either of these conditions for forced termination is met, in step S1807, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of coins in the advantageous zone increase/decrease MY are cleared to 0. In the next step S1808, a process is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. Then, in step S1809, a process is performed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous zone, and in step S1810, a process is performed to clear the normal counter.

In the initialization process for advantageous zone information in step S1809, flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous zone, as well as flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, are returned to their initial values. For example, if advantageous zone flags, AT mode win flags, AT mode flags, various CZ mode flags, etc. are set and not cleared, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the advantageous zone game count AG, advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, premonition counter for premonition mode, counters for the number of continued games in CZ mode, etc. are greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, in the initialization process, for the advantageous zone as an advantageous state using push order notifications, all variables and parameters that affect the performance of push order notifications are initialized, and RAM is cleared for such variables and parameters.

After step S1810 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1806 (the number of games played in the advantageous zone AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of coins added or subtracted in the advantageous zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase), the second interval display process is terminated. Note that the second interval display process does not perform the process of grasping the current game state or the process of determining whether the number of bets corresponds to the game state, as in steps S1201 and S1202 of the game count update process (FIG. 39). Therefore, the number of games played in the advantageous zone AG (the number of games played in the advantageous zone) and the number of coins added or subtracted in the advantageous zone MY (the difference between the number of coins paid out in the advantageous zone and the number of coins inserted in the advantageous zone) are updated each time a game is played (step S1802), regardless of the number of coins bet when the game is played. In other words, the process of updating the number of games played in the advantageous zone and the number of coins added or subtracted is performed even when a game is played with two coins bet, unlike the case of the number of games remaining in premonition mode, CZ mode, and AT mode.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 46.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 46, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, is off (not lit). In this normal zone, push order notifications are not provided. In other words, while advantageous zones have the ability to provide instruction functions such as push order notifications, normal zones are zones that do not have such instruction functions. The situation in which the display mode is normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal zone.

In the normal zone, if the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, for example by winning minor prize 7 (watermelon), the number of games played in the advantageous zone (counting the number of advantageous zone games AG) will begin to be measured from the game following the game in which the game result that triggered the win is realized. Then, if the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won during the advantageous zone, and a win notification and AT mode flag are set, creating a situation in which a push order notification can be generated, the conditions for starting the display of the zone indicator are met, and the eighth display segment N8 will light up.

After that, while the eighth display segment N8 is lit, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player can understand the push order based on this push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information begins to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in that game, and ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on in that game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous zone, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on, while the display of the advantageous zone by the eighth display segment N8 continues. Then, if a push order role is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order role is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the final game of the advantageous zone is reached, for example, because the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit or the number of medal increases in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit increase, the eighth display segment N8 also goes out and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. In this embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when medal payout is completed (by the second zone display process, which is the process that follows the payout determination process). Note that if no medal payout is made in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game in question was the final game of the advantageous zone.

As mentioned above, the number of games in the advantageous zone is counted from the game following the game that wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, while the push order notification only occurs while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, even if the zone is an advantageous zone, the push order notification does not occur in zones where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific zones). In other words, by checking whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is lit, it is possible to clearly determine whether the advantageous zone is at least a situation in which the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed (specific zone, zone of actual increase). In this way, the manager of the amusement hall can clearly determine, for example, whether an increase in medals is occurring by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous zone, or whether fraudulent activity is occurring that results in an increase in medals by illegally enjoying the benefit of the push order notification even when the zone is not an advantageous zone.

<Performance setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 47. The effect setting process is initiated by the CPU 181 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1902, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, which is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands from previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1901, or after the processing of step S1902 has been executed, step S1903 determines whether the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 in response to a bet operation, such as a bet command set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a bet command, step S1904 executes bet effect setting processing to set effects based on the current bet operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1903, or after the processing of step S1904 has been executed, step S1905 determines whether the newly received command is a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery processing, there are also premonition start commands, premonition game count update commands, CZ win commands, CZ game count update commands, CZ addition commands, AT win commands, and AT game count update commands set in the lottery result response processing (Figure 27) and the game count update processing (Figure 39). If the command is one of these start commands, step S1906 executes start effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1905, or after the processing of step S1906 has been executed, step S1907 determines whether the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. A command at the time of each stop operation is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation being performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (Figure 22). If the stop command is a stop command at the time of each stop operation, step S1908 executes a performance setting process at the time of each stop operation to set performance based on the current stop operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1907, or after the processing of step S1908 has been executed, in step S1909 it is determined whether the newly received command is an all-stop command. An all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. It includes the winning result command set in step S417 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22), as well as the premonition end command, CZ start command, CZ end command, first AT win notification command, second AT win notification command, AT start command, AT additional command, AT end command, first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, and second BB end command, which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 40) or bonus state processing (FIG. 24). If it is one of these all-stop commands, in step S1910 the all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1909, or after the processing of step S1910 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting processing ends. In step S1911, effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), and settings for error notifications are set.

The following explains the start-time effect setting process and the all-stop effect setting process.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-up effect setting process of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result for the game to be started this time is a push order role win. If the push order role win is a push order role win, in step S2102 it is determined whether a push order notification command has been received. If a push order notification command has been received, in step S2103 it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is normal reply B. If the push order notification command is set in a game that is normal reply B, this means that this is the start game of the first AT mode, and in this case, in step S2104, a setting process is executed to perform a push order notification effect corresponding to a second replay win.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, a judgment is made in step S2105 as to whether the lottery result for this game is normal lip C. If the push order notification command is set in a game that is normal lip C, this means that this is the start game of the second AT mode, and in this case, setting processing is executed in step S2106 to perform the push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, this means that the lottery result for this game is a push order bell win. In this case, in step S2107, settings are executed to display push order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth small wins on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the lottery result for this game is not a win for the push order role, then in step S2108 it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a win for a specific role. A specific role is a lottery result known as a rare role that is unlikely to appear (be won) as a lottery result for each game. In this embodiment, chance eye A to chance eye C, cherry A to cherry C, and watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in Figure 30, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition is more likely to be won than when a lottery result other than a specific role is triggered. If the lottery result for this game is a win for a specific role, then in step S2109, processing for announcing a specific role is executed. The processing for announcing a specific role will be explained in detail later.

After execution of step S2104, step S2106, step S2107, or step S2109, step S2110 determines whether a CZ game number addition command has been received. If a CZ game number addition command has been received, step S2111 executes processing to set up a CZ game number addition effect. In the processing to set up the CZ game number addition effect, an addition effect is executed in which the number of games added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notification corresponding to the addition of the number of games remaining in CZ mode. Note that the form of the addition effect is not limited to a form executed in the game in which the addition was executed, and may include, for example, a form in which the number of games added is notified a predetermined number of times after the game in which the addition was executed, or, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a form is included in a so-called post-addition effect in which an addition effect is executed when the number of games remaining in CZ mode reaches a predetermined number (e.g., one game remaining).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2110, or after the processing of step S2111 is executed, the bonus effect setting processing is executed in step S2112, and the continuous effect setting processing is executed in step S2113. The subsequent step S2114 executes continuous effect standby processing, and the continuous effect execution processing is executed in step S2115. The processing of steps S2112 to S2115 will be explained in detail later.

After step S2115 is executed, other start-up effect setting processing is executed in step S2116, after which this start-up effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2116, for example, processing is performed to set an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, or to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<About continuous performances>
The continuous effects according to this embodiment are a series of effects that are performed over multiple games, and in the final game, whether or not a player has won a transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode is notified. In this case, the start timing of the continuous effects (start game of the continuous effects) is controlled in accordance with the progress of the premonition mode so that the notification of the win in the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode is made in accordance with the end timing of the premonition mode set by the main control device 101.

However, as mentioned above, if a game is played with a bet number that does not match the specified number (if the start lever 41 is operated with a bet number of 2), the main control device 101 will not update the number of remaining games in the premonition mode, effectively extending the period of the premonition mode. As a result, the timing of the winning notification game in the consecutive effects and the end of the premonition mode will not be synchronized, which can result in inconveniences such as the push order notification effect for transitioning to AT mode not being executed for a long time even though a winning notification in the consecutive effects has been made in AT mode.

In this embodiment, therefore, the continuous performance configuration has been devised to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. The specific configuration will be explained in detail below.

<Continuous performance setting process>
The continuous effect setting process of step S2113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 49. The continuous effect setting process is a setting process for executing the continuous effect for this precursor (continuous effect that notifies winning of CZ mode, etc.).

In the continuous performance setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether a first BB end command or a second BB end command has been received. If neither a first BB end command nor a second BB end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2202, where it is determined whether a premonition start command has been received. The premonition start command is a command sent when the main control device 101 transitions to premonition mode, and this step determines whether the transition to premonition mode has begun.

If a premonition start command has been received (if transition to premonition mode has begun), proceed to step S2203, where this premonition flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. This premonition flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that this consecutive performance is triggered by a win in CZ mode, AT mode, or an additional game count in AT mode; in other words, that a notification (success effect or victory effect) corresponding to a win in each of the above modes should be executed as the conclusion of the consecutive performance.

In the following step S2204, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-omen flag is stored in each of the flag storage areas 183a. The pseudo-omen flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that this consecutive performance is not triggered by a win in the CZ mode or the like; in other words, that a notification corresponding to a non-win in each of the modes (such as a failure or defeat effect) should be executed as the conclusion of the consecutive performance.

If the pseudo premonition flag is not stored, proceed to step S2205, where the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is determined. This process is performed based on the premonition start command sent from the main control unit 101. In the following step S2206, a value corresponding to the number of games remaining in the premonition mode determined in step S2205 is set to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. The premonition counter is a counter for counting the number of games remaining in the premonition mode; in other words, it is used by the CPU 181 to determine the number of games remaining in the premonition mode. In other words, in this embodiment, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is managed by each of the CPU 102 on the main control unit 101 side and the CPU 181 on the display control unit 81 side.

After step S2206 is executed, in step S2207, the premonition performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182.

Here, we will provide an overview of the continuous effects. In this embodiment, a first continuous effect and a second continuous effect are provided for consecutive consecutive effects. First, we will explain the first continuous effect with reference to Figures 58 to 60.

The first consecutive performance is composed of a start performance that is executed in the first game of the consecutive performance, a preparation performance that is executed after that, and a final performance that is executed after the preparation performance. The final performance of the first consecutive performance is a transformation performance to see whether or not the girl character 201 can transform into the wizard character 202, and the preparation performance is an item acquisition performance in which an item (transformation goods) is acquired for the transformation performance.

In the start effect of the first continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 58(a), a text image 203 such as "I'm transforming!" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 along with the girl character 201. This start effect is executed, for example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the start game of the continuous effect. Note that the start effect is executed over the course of one game.

In the preparation effect for the first consecutive effect (item acquisition effect), first, as shown in Figures 58(b) and (c), a treasure chest image 204 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and then, as shown in Figures 59(a) to (c), an item image 205 is displayed on the same display screen. The item image 205 is displayed so that it appears to emerge from the treasure chest image 204.

Treasure chest effects in which a treasure chest image 204 is displayed include treasure chest effect A (Figure 58(b)) and treasure chest effect B (Figure 58(c)), which have different colored treasure chests, and the color of the treasure chest indicates the likelihood of winning in CZ mode, etc. For example, treasure chest effect B, in which a red treasure chest image 204b is displayed, has a higher likelihood of winning in CZ mode, etc., than treasure chest effect A, in which a yellow treasure chest image 204a is displayed.

In addition, item effects A to C, which display item images 205, are available, each representing a different type of item, with the type of item indicating the likelihood of winning a CZ mode or other mode. For example, item effect C, which displays a walking stick image 205c, has the highest likelihood of winning a CZ mode or other mode, item effect A, which displays a toothbrush image 205a, has the lowest likelihood, and item effect B, which displays a pendant image 205b, is somewhere in between.

The above preparation effect is executed over the course of one game. Specifically, the treasure chest effect begins when the start lever 41 is operated in the game in which the preparation effect is executed (when the reels 32L-32R start to spin), and then the item effect begins after a predetermined period of time has passed or when the stop switches 42-44 are operated (for example, when the final stop operation is performed).

In the final performance (transformation performance) of the first continuous performance, as shown in FIG. 60, an image of the process of girl character 201 transforming into wizard character 202 is displayed on the display screen of auxiliary display unit 65, followed by a result image indicating whether the transformation was successful or unsuccessful. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 60(a), girl character 201 is shown chanting the spell to transform, and then, as shown in FIG. 60(b), girl character 201 is shown surrounded by a dazzling light along with the spell. If an item has been acquired in the preparation performance, girl character 201 in FIG. 60(a) is displayed holding the acquired item. Then, when a notification corresponding to a win in CZ mode or the like is made, a result image (ending image) is displayed in which the light subsides and wizard character 202, who has successfully transformed, appears, as shown in FIG. 60(c1). On the other hand, when a notification corresponding to a loss in CZ mode or the like is made, a result image is displayed in which the light subsides and girl character 201, who has failed to transform, appears, as shown in FIG. 60(c2).

The above-mentioned final effect is executed over two games. Specifically, when the start lever 41 is operated in the game in which the final effect is executed (when the reels 32L-32R start to spin), the image in Figure 60(a) is displayed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, or when the stop switches 42-44 are operated (for example, when the first stop operation is performed), the image in Figure 60(b) is displayed. Then, when the start lever 41 is operated in the next game (when the reels 32L-32R start to spin), the image in Figure 60(c1) or Figure 60(c2) is displayed.

Next, the second consecutive performance will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 63. The second consecutive performance is also composed of a start performance executed in the starting game of the consecutive performance, a preparation performance executed after that, and a final performance executed after the preparation performance. The final performance of the second consecutive performance is a battle performance in which the warrior character 211 determines whether or not he can defeat the enemy character 212, and the preparation performance is an item acquisition performance in which an item (weapon) is acquired for the battle performance. The number of games executed and the start timing of each performance are the same as in the first consecutive performance described above.

In the start effect of the second consecutive effect, as shown in FIG. 61(a), a text image 213 such as "Prepare for battle!!" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 along with an enemy character 212. In addition, in the preparation effect (item acquisition effect) of the second consecutive effect, first, as in the first consecutive effect, treasure chest effect A (FIG. 61(a)) or treasure chest effect B (FIG. 61(b)) is executed, and then, as shown in FIGS. 62(a) to (c), an item effect in which an item image 215 is displayed is executed. In the item effect, for example, item effect C in which a gun image 215c is displayed has the highest chance of winning in CZ mode, etc., item effect A in which a toothbrush image 215a is displayed has the lowest chance, and item effect B in which a knife image 215b is displayed is somewhere in between.

In the final performance (battle performance) of the second consecutive performance, as shown in Figures 63(a) and (b), an image of the warrior character 211 attacking and an image of the enemy character 212 being attacked are displayed, followed by a result image showing the outcome of the battle and informing the player of whether or not they have won the CZ mode, etc. Specifically, when an announcement corresponding to a win in the CZ mode, etc., is made, an image of the warrior character 211 defeating the enemy character 212 and winning is displayed, as shown in Figure 63(c1), and when an announcement corresponding to a loss in the CZ mode, etc., is made, an image of the warrior character 211 being defeated by the enemy character 212 is displayed, as shown in Figure 63(c2).

In the continuous effects according to this embodiment, the first or second continuous effects are executed over a number of games selected by lottery from 3 to 5 games.

Returning to the explanation of the consecutive performance setting process (Figure 49), in the actual premonition performance table obtained in step S2207, as shown in Figure 50, performance scenarios corresponding to the number of games played in the consecutive performance are set as the actual premonition performance scenario for each of the first and second consecutive performances. Each of these performance scenarios produces a final performance of a successful transformation or battle victory, and is intended to notify the player of a win in CZ mode, etc. Incidentally, when three games are played, the preparatory performance (item acquisition performance) is not performed, and the final performance (transformation performance or battle performance) is performed after the start performance; and when five games are played, the preparatory performance is performed twice after the start performance, and then the final performance is performed.

In this premonition effect table, the probability of selecting five games as the number of games to be played in a continuous effect is highest, and the probability of selecting three games is lowest. Therefore, the more games to be played in a continuous effect, the higher the chance of winning in CZ mode, etc.

After the main premonition effect table is obtained in step S2207, the lottery process for the continuous effects is executed in step S2208. In the lottery process for the continuous effects, a random number for the continuous effects lottery is obtained, and the obtained random number and the main premonition effect table obtained above are used to draw lots for the number of games to be played in the continuous effects and the effect scenario to be executed.

In the following step S2209, as part of the effect data setting process, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created. This scenario data table is stored (set) in the effect setting data storage area 183c of RAM 183. As shown in FIG. 51, the scenario data table sets information about the effect video to be executed in each game in association with the number of consecutive games to be executed. In this embodiment, the value of the consecutive effect counter is used as the number of games in which consecutive effects are executed. Note that the consecutive effect counter is used by the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of games in which consecutive effects are executed or the number of games remaining, and is decremented by one for each game in which consecutive effects are being executed.

50 (a scenario in which the number of games in the continuous performance is five and a transformation performance of the girl character 201 is executed) is selected as the performance scenario for the current continuous performance through the lottery process. In the scenario data table, as shown in FIG. 51(a), information corresponding to the performance video of the continuous performance scenario K-1 (start performance) is set as the performance information to be executed in the first game, information corresponding to the performance video of the continuous performance scenario K-2 (performance in which a pendant is acquired) is set as the performance information to be executed in the second game, information corresponding to the performance video of the continuous performance scenario K-3 (performance in which a walking stick is acquired) is set as the performance information to be executed in the third game, information corresponding to the continuous performance scenario K-4 (performance in which a transformation is attempted) is set as the performance information to be executed in the fourth game, and information corresponding to the continuous performance scenario K-5 (performance in which the transformation is successful) is set as the performance information to be executed in the fifth game. The performance video information may be identification information indicating the video data (unique information assigned to each performance video) or information indicating the storage area in which the video data is stored (address information in ROM 182).

In addition, in step S2209, the information on the presentation video of this premonition preliminary scenario is set in the scenario data table along with the presentation scenario of the continuous presentation. This premonition preliminary scenario is set separately from the actual continuous presentation (in other words, it is not set as an actual continuous presentation), and is a preliminary presentation for when the number of premonition games is not updated during the execution of the continuous presentation (when the game is started with the number of bets set to 2).

This premonition preliminary scenario is provided for the first consecutive performance and the second consecutive performance, and specifically, a separate premonition preliminary scenario is prepared for each of the premonition scenarios A to N shown in Figure 50. Furthermore, each premonition preliminary scenario has multiple types of presentations prepared according to the number of games in which the consecutive performance is executed.

For example, as shown in Figure 51(a), if main premonition scenario K is selected as the performance scenario for the continuous performance, the main premonition backup scenario K corresponding to the main premonition scenario K is set in the scenario data table. The main premonition backup scenario K is made up of multiple performances, including main premonition backup scenarios K1 to K-3 and a transformation scenario, and each performance corresponds to the value of the performance counter.

When the value of the consecutive counter is 5, the actual premonition preliminary scenario K-1 is related to the actual premonition scenario K-1 in terms of the presentation content. In the presentation of the actual premonition preliminary scenario K-1, for example, as shown in Figure 64(a), a text display 221 suggesting the start of the first consecutive presentation, such as "Next Transformation Challenge," is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the value of the continuity counter is 4, this premonition preliminary scenario K-2 suggests or heightens the expectation of a red treasure chest, which is related to this premonition scenario K-2. In the presentation of this premonition preliminary scenario K-2, for example, as shown in Figure 64(b), a text display 222 such as "If it's a red treasure chest, it's your chance!" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 along with the girl character 201 and treasure chest image 204.

When the value of the continuity counter is 3, this premonition preliminary scenario K-3 suggests or heightens anticipation of a walking stick (an item acquired in this premonition scenario K-3) as something related to this premonition scenario K-3. In the presentation of this premonition preliminary scenario K-3, for example, as shown in Figure 64(c), text display 223 such as "I want a walking stick!" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 along with the girl character 201 and walking stick image 205c.

When the continuous counter value is 2 or 1, the actual premonition preliminary scenario - transformation is related to the actual premonition scenarios K-4 and K-5 and suggests a successful transformation or heightens the sense of anticipation. In the actual premonition preliminary scenario - transformation performance, for example, as shown in Figure 64(d), an enlarged image 224 of the girl character's face is displayed in a cut-in format along with text 225 such as "It's time to transform!" Note that the actual premonition preliminary scenario - transformation is a common preliminary performance in the actual premonition scenarios A, C-E, and I-K for the first continuous performance.

Furthermore, for example, as shown in Figure 51 (b), if main premonition scenario H is selected as the performance scenario for the continuous performance, a main premonition backup scenario H corresponding to the main premonition scenario H is set. The main premonition backup scenario H is also made up of multiple performances, each corresponding to the value of the performance counter.

When the consecutive counter value is 4, the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-1 is related in terms of the presentation content in relation to the actual premonition scenario H-1. In the presentation of the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-1, for example, as shown in Figure 65(a), a text display 231 suggesting the start of the second consecutive presentation, such as "Next Battle," is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the value of the continuity counter is 3, this premonition preliminary scenario H-2 suggests or heightens anticipation of a red treasure chest, which is related to this premonition scenario H-2. In the presentation of this premonition preliminary scenario H-2, for example, as shown in Figure 65(b), a text display 232 such as "I want a red treasure chest" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 along with the warrior character 211 and treasure chest image 204.

When the value of the continuous counter is 2 or 1, the Precursor Preliminary Scenario - For Battle is related to the Precursor Scenarios H-3 and H-4 and suggests victory in the battle or heightens the sense of anticipation. In the Precursor Preliminary Scenario - For Battle performance, for example, as shown in Figure 65(c), an enlarged image 234 of the warrior character's face is displayed in a cut-in format along with text 235 such as "Let's go!!" Note that the Precursor Preliminary Scenario - For Battle is a common preliminary performance for the Precursor Scenarios B, F-H, and L-N for the second continuous performance.

Returning to the explanation of the continuous effect setting process (Figure 49), after the effect data setting process (scenario data table creation process) in step S2209 is executed, in step S2210 a value is set in the effect standby counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. The effect standby counter is used by the CPU 181 to determine the number of standby games until the start of continuous effects. For example, if the number of continuing games (number of remaining games) in the premonition mode determined in step S2205 above is 10 games, and the number of consecutive games selected in the lottery process in step S2208 above is 4 games, the value of the effect standby counter is set to 6.

In step S2211, a value is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. As already explained, the continuous effect counter is used to count the number of games in which continuous effects have been executed or the number of games remaining. For example, if the number of games in which continuous effects have been executed selected in the lottery process in step S2208 above is four, the value of the effect standby counter is set to four.

Next, in step S2212, a performance standby flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183, and then this continuous consecutive performance setting process is terminated. The performance standby flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that it is waiting for the start of a continuous performance.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2204 (if the pseudo premonition flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2213, where the pseudo premonition flag stored in the various flags storage area 183a is cleared. In the following step S2214, the value of the pseudo premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 is cleared to 0. The pseudo premonition counter will be described later. After step S2214 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2205, where a process is executed to determine the number of games to be continued or the number of games remaining in the premonition mode.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step S2201 (if the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received), the process proceeds to step S2215, where it is determined whether or not the present premonition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If the present premonition flag is stored, the process of acquiring the present premonition effect table in step S2207 is executed, and if the present premonition flag is not stored, the process of setting the continuous effects is terminated.

<Processing for notifying specific roles>
The specific role notification process of step S2109 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 52. The specific role notification process performs setting processing for continuous effects for pseudo-premonitions (continuous effects that notify non-winning of CZ mode, etc.).

In the special role notification process, first, in step S2301, a chance effect lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a chance effect as the effect for this game. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 66(d), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance!!" and characters with exclamation marks are displayed corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Note that the winning probability in the chance effect lottery process may be configured to differ depending on the type of special role, game status, setting value, etc.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2301 has been won. If the lottery process has been won, in step S2303, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect for this game.

After step S2303 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2302 (if the chance effect lottery is not won), steps S2304 to S2306 determine whether the current start command includes any of the following: a premonition start command, a CZ addition command, or an AT win command. If any of these commands is included, the specific role notification process is terminated; if none of these commands is included, a pseudo premonition mode execution lottery is executed in step S2307.

The pseudo premonition mode is a mode that keeps the player hopeful that the transition to the premonition mode has occurred (in other words, that they have won the CZ mode, etc.), even though they have not actually transitioned to the premonition mode. In this embodiment, the period of this pseudo premonition mode is used to execute a series of effects to notify the player that they have not won the CZ mode, etc. Note that, as with the premonition mode, the number of games that the pseudo premonition mode continues is often set to a number greater than the number of games in the series of effects. In such cases, a hyping effect (an effect other than a series of effects) is executed in the period before the series of effects begins to make the player hopeful of winning. Because this hyping effect is executed to varying degrees even in the period before the series of effects begins in the premonition mode, it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between the premonition mode and the pseudo premonition mode.

In step S2308, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-omen mode execution lottery in step S2307 has been won. If the player has not won, the specific role notification process is terminated; if the player has won, the process proceeds to step S2309, where a pseudo-omen flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo-omen flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the pseudo-omen mode is in progress.

Next, in step S2310, a pseudo-omen effect table is retrieved from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. The pseudo-omen effect table is used to draw effect scenarios for consecutive effects when a non-win in CZ mode or the like is notified. As shown in FIG. 53, the pseudo-omen effect table sets effect scenarios for the first and second consecutive effects as pseudo-omen effect scenarios corresponding to the number of games in which the consecutive effects are executed. Each of these effect scenarios results in the final effect being an effect of a failed transformation or a battle defeat. In the pseudo-omen effect table, three games are most likely to be selected as the number of games in which the consecutive effects are executed, and five games are least likely to be selected.

After the pseudo-omen effect table is obtained in step S2310, the lottery process for consecutive effects is executed in step S2311. In the lottery process for consecutive effects, a random number for consecutive effect lottery is obtained, and the obtained random number and the obtained pseudo-omen effect table are used to draw lots for the number of games to be played in consecutive effects and the effect scenario to be executed.

In step S2312, as part of the effect data setting process, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created and stored (set) in the effect setting data memory area 183c of RAM 183. In the scenario data table for pseudo-omen, as with the scenario data table for main omen (Figure 51), information about the effect video to be executed in each game is set in correspondence with the number of consecutive games executed. However, information about the effect video for the backup scenario is not set in the scenario data table for pseudo-omen.

In step S2313, a value is set in the pseudo premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183. The pseudo premonition counter allows the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the pseudo premonition mode. In step S2314, a value is set in the effect standby counter provided in the various counter area 183b, and in the following step S2315, a value is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b. Note that the processing of steps S2314 and S2315 is similar to the processing of steps S2201 and S2211 in the continuous selection setting processing (Figure 49).

After step S2315 is executed, in step S2316, the effect standby flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a, and then this continuous consecutive win setting process is terminated.

<Continuous performance standby processing>
The continuous effect standby process of step S2114 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 54. The continuous effect standby process controls the start timing (start game) of each continuous effect for the main precursor and pseudo precursor.

In the continuous effect standby process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a performance standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that a performance standby flag is stored (the continuous effect standby state is in progress), the process proceeds to step S2402, where it is determined whether or not a premonition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

If it is determined that this premonition flag is stored, proceed to step S2403 and determine whether a premonition game count update command has been received as the current start command. The premonition game count update command is a command that indicates that the number of remaining games in premonition mode has been updated in the main control device 101. If it is determined that a premonition game count command has been received, in step S2404, the value of this premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 is decremented by 1.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step S2402 (the actual precursor flag is not stored), this means that a pseudo precursor flag is stored. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2405, where the value of the pseudo precursor counter provided in the counter area 183b is decremented by 1.

After step S2404 or step S2405 is executed, in step S2406, the value of the effect standby counter provided in the counter area 183b is decremented by 1. This updates the number of standby games until the start of continuous effects. In the following step S2407, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter is 0, i.e., whether the number of standby games until the start of continuous effects is 0.

If the effect counter value is not 0 (if the number of waiting games is 1 or more), the process continues to wait for the start of continuous effects and ends this continuous effects waiting process. On the other hand, if the effect counter value is 0, the effect waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared (erased) in step S2408, and then in the following step S2409, the continuous effects flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. The continuous effects flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine whether a continuous effect should be executed or whether a continuous effect is currently being executed. After step S2409 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S2401 (if the effect waiting flag is not stored), this continuous effects waiting process ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2403 (if the premonition game count command has not been received), the continuous effect standby process is terminated without executing the processes from step S2404 onwards. In other words, if the premonition game count command has not been received and the number of remaining games in the premonition mode has not been updated in the main control unit 101, the subtraction process (update process) of the premonition counter and the effect standby counter is not executed.

<Processing for executing continuous effects>
The continuous performance execution process of step S2115 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 55. The continuous performance execution process executes continuous performance based on the scenario data for the actual premonition set in the continuous performance setting process (Fig. 49) and the scenario data for the pseudo premonition set in the specific role notification process (Fig. 52).

In the continuous performance execution process, first in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a continuous performance flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that a continuous performance flag is not stored (if the situation does not call for the execution of continuous performance), this continuous performance execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a continuous performance flag is stored (if the situation calls for the execution of continuous performance), it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a real premonition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. In other words, it is determined whether the situation calls for the execution of continuous performance for a real premonition, or for the execution of continuous performance for a pseudo premonition.

If it is determined that the main premonition flag is stored (if the situation is such that the main premonition continuous effect should be executed), the process proceeds to step S2503, where it is determined whether a second BB start command has been received as the current start command. The second BB start command is a command that indicates the start of the second BB state. If a player plays a game with a bet of 2 while the main premonition continuous effect is being executed, a second BB win may be achieved, and the second BB state may begin. This step determines whether such a second BB state has begun.

If the second BB start command has not been received, step S2504 determines whether a premonition game count update command has been received as the current start command. If the premonition game count update command has been received and the main control unit 101 has updated the number of remaining games in premonition mode, proceed to step S2505. In step S2505, the main premonition scenario corresponding to the current value of the continuous performance counter is executed based on the scenario data for the main premonition set in the continuous performance setting process (Figure 49). For example, as shown in Figure 51(b), if main premonition scenario H is set as the continuous performance for the main premonition, and the current value of the continuous performance counter is 3, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to execute the performance of main premonition scenario H-2 in the current game. In the following step S2506, the value of the continuous performance counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 is decremented by 1, and then the main premonition execution process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2504 above (the premonition game count update command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2507, where the performance of the premonition preliminary scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous performance counter at that time is executed based on the scenario data for the premonition set in the continuous performance setting process (Figure 49). For example, as shown in Figure 51 (b), if the premonition scenario H is set as the continuous performance for the premonition, and the value of the continuous performance counter at that time is 3, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that the performance of the premonition preliminary scenario H-2 is executed in the current game.

After step S2504 is executed, the process for executing this continuous performance is terminated. In other words, if the premonition game count command has not been received and the number of remaining games in the premonition mode has not been updated in the main control unit 101 (in other words, if the performance of this premonition preliminary scenario has been executed), the subtraction process (update process) of the continuous performance counter is not executed.

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S2503 above (if a second BB start command has been received), the process proceeds to step S2508, where the scenario data table (performance data for continuous performance) stored in the performance setting data storage area 183c of RAM 183 is cleared (erased). In the following step S2509, the continuous performance flags stored in the various flag storage area 183a above are cleared (erased), and then the continuous performance execution process is terminated. This stops the continuous performance currently being executed.

When the first BB state or second BB state is being executed, the main control device 101 does not update the number of games remaining in the premonition mode, just as when the number of bets does not match the specific specified number (if a positive judgment is made in step S1203 of FIG. 39). However, in the first BB state or second BB state, it is expected that the bonus state will continue for a relatively long period of time, for example, approximately 30 games. In this way, even if the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is not updated, just as when the number of bets does not match the specific specified number, if this period is expected to continue for a long period of time, the system is configured to not respond by executing a preliminary effect, but to stop the continuous effect itself.

For example, if a configuration were adopted in which preliminary effects were inserted when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state, as in the case of a two-bet game, it would be necessary to prepare a large amount of video data for this premonition preliminary scenario and store a large amount of such video data in ROM 182. This would increase the burden on gaming machine designers and raise concerns that the capacity of ROM 182 would be strained. Furthermore, there is the inconvenience of players feeling uncomfortable because the preliminary effects are executed for a long time without any progress being made in the content of the consecutive effects. In this regard, this embodiment can respond by using preliminary effects or canceling the consecutive effects altogether depending on the length of the period during which the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of each of the above inconveniences.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2502 above (the situation is such that a pseudo-omen continuous performance should be executed), the process proceeds to step S2510, where a pseudo-omen scenario corresponding to the current value of the continuous performance counter is executed based on the pseudo-omen scenario data set in the specific role notification process (Figure 52). In the following step S2511, the value of the continuous performance counter set in the various counter area 183b is decremented by 1, and then the continuous performance execution process is terminated. In other words, if a pseudo-omen continuous performance should be executed, the execution process of the pseudo-omen scenario set as the continuous performance and the decrement process (update process) of the continuous performance counter are executed, regardless of whether the number of remaining games in the premonition mode has been updated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The process of setting the effects when all the devices are stopped in step S1910 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has been received as the current full stop command. If either of these commands has been received, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an AT winning notification effect is performed for the current game. In the AT winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "AT confirmed." Note that if the first AT winning notification command has been received, an AT winning notification effect corresponding to the first AT is performed, and if the second AT winning notification command has been received, an AT winning notification effect corresponding to the second AT is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2601 (the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has not been received), then in step S2603 it is determined whether an AT start command has been received as the current full stop command. If an AT start command has been received, then in step S2604 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an AT start effect is performed in the next game. In the AT start effect, for example, as shown in Figure 66 (b), text such as "AT Start!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2603 (if an AT start command has not been received), then in step S2605 it is determined whether an AT end command has been received as the current full stop command. If an AT end command has been received, then in step S2606 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an AT end effect is performed for the current game. In the AT end effect, for example, as shown in Figure 66(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "AT END."

If a negative judgment is made in step S2605 (if the AT end command has not been received), then in step S2607 it is determined whether a CZ start command has been received as the current full stop command. If a CZ start command has been received, then in step S2608 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a CZ start effect is performed in the next game. In the CZ start effect, for example, as shown in Figure 67 (c), text such as "CZ mode start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2607 (if a CZ start command has not been received), then in step S2609 it is determined whether a CZ end command has been received as the current full stop command. If a CZ end command has been received, then in step S2610 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a CZ end effect is performed for the current game. In the CZ end effect, for example, as shown in Figure 67 (d), text such as "CZ mode end" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2609 (the CZ end command has not been received), then in step S2611, it is determined whether a premonition end command has been received as the current full stop command. If a premonition end command has been received, then in steps S2612 and S2613, the premonition flag and continuous performance flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183 are cleared (erased).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2611 (the premonition end command has not been received), step S2614 determines whether the value of the continuous performance counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 is 0. If the value of the continuous performance counter is 0, steps S2615 and S2616 clear (erase) the pseudo premonition flag and continuous performance flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

In the following step S2617, it is determined whether the second BB state is in progress. If a player bets two and plays a game while the pseudo-omen continuous performance is being performed, a second BB win may be achieved, causing a transition to the second BB state. This step determines whether the second BB state to which this transition has occurred is in progress. If it is determined in step S2617 that the second BB state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2618, where a pseudo-omen end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo-omen end flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the pseudo-omen continuous performance has ended.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2614 above (if the value of the continuous effect counter is not 0), step S2619 determines whether a first BB end command or a second BB end command has been received as the current full stop command. If either of these commands has been received, step S2620 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to perform a bonus end effect for the current game. In the bonus end effect, for example, as shown in Figure 67(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "BONUS END."

After executing the processing of step S2602, step S2604, step S2606, step S2608, step S2610, step S2613, step S2618, or step S2620, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2619, other stop-time effects are set in step S2621, and then this effect setting process ends. In step S2621, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Bonus performance setting process>
The bonus performance setting process in step S2112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 57.

In the bonus effect setting process, first in step S2701, it is determined whether a pseudo-omen flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that a pseudo-omen flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2702, where it is determined whether a first BB start command or a second BB start command has been received as the current start command. In other words, it is determined whether this is the start game of a bonus game. The bonus game starts from the game following the first BB win or the second BB win, and ends when the total number of medals paid out since the start game reaches the upper payout limit.

If a first BB start command or a second BB start command has been received, processing is performed in step S2703 to determine the current bonus type. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on a first BB win or a second BB win. Then, in step S2704, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type determined in step S2703 is set.

In the bonus effect, for example, after the bonus start effect shown in Figure 67 (a) is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, an animated video effect is executed in which a predetermined character or the like appears. In addition, a predetermined sound effect (sound effect) is also output from the speaker 64. The animation effect in this case is set to repeatedly play, for example, a five-minute animated video. Note that the progress of the effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be stopped when the five-minute animated video ends, and only the sound effect may be repeated.

Incidentally, the bonus game in this embodiment involves a reduction in medals, which is not desirable for players, so the bonus presentation may be configured to display only the animation described above, without the opening presentation shown in Figure 67(a) or the ending presentation shown in Figure 67(b).

After step S2704 is executed, the bonus effect setting process ends. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S2701 above (if a series of pseudo-omen effects is being executed), the bonus effect setting process ends without executing step S2702 and subsequent steps. In other words, if the second BB state starts while a series of pseudo-omen effects is being executed, the continuation of the series of effects takes priority without starting the bonus effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2702 (the first BB start command or the second BB start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2705, where it is determined whether the first BB state or the second BB state is in progress. If either of these BB states is in progress, it is determined in step S2706 whether a pseudo-omen end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If a pseudo-omen end flag is stored, the pseudo-omen end flag is cleared (erased) in step S2707, and the process proceeds to step S2703. In other words, if the second BB state is started while a pseudo-omen continuous effect is being executed, the bonus effect is controlled so that it starts after the ongoing continuous effect has ended. Note that if a negative judgment is made in step S2705 or step S2706, the bonus effect setting process is terminated.

<About the flow of consecutive performances>
The flow of the consecutive presentations for this premonition will be explained with reference to Figure 68. Here, we will explain an example in which the player bets two on the second and fourth games from the start of the consecutive presentations, and the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated in those games. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51(b), it is assumed that the consecutive presentation for this premonition has selected the consecutive presentation for this premonition, i.e., the consecutive presentation of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears.

When the number of games remaining in the premonition mode reaches four, the start effect of main premonition scenario H-1 is executed as the main premonition consecutive effect (Figure 68(a)). Then, if the player bets two in the second game from the start of the consecutive effects, the main premonition preliminary scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as the preliminary effect (Figure 68(b)). After that, if the player bets three in the third game from the start of the consecutive effects, the main premonition scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as the preparation effect (item acquisition effect) (Figure 68(c)).

In other words, the presentation of Premonition Preliminary Scenario H-2, which was performed two games after the start of the consecutive presentation, is inserted between the start presentation of Premonition Scenario H-1 in the first game of the consecutive presentation and the preparation presentation of Premonition Scenario H-2, which was originally supposed to be performed in the second game. Therefore, even if two bet games are played in the second game after the start of the consecutive presentation, and the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is not updated, and there is a one-game delay in the end game of the premonition mode (the end game where the consecutive presentation should notify a win), the progress of the consecutive presentation is delayed accordingly, thereby synchronizing the premonition mode and the consecutive presentation.

When the player again bets two in the fourth game from the start of the consecutive effects, the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-3 set in the scenario data table is executed as a preliminary effect (Figure 68 (d)). As with the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-2, the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-3 is executed by being inserted between the preparatory effect for the actual premonition scenario H-2, which should have taken place in the second game, and the battle effect for the actual premonition scenario H-3, which should have taken place in the third game.

Then, when the player bets 3 in the fifth and sixth games from the start of the consecutive effects, the final effects (battle effects) of the premonition scenarios H-3 and H-4 set in the scenario data are executed (Figures 68 (e) and (f)), and a win notification for the CZ mode or similar is made in the sixth game from the start of the consecutive effects. In this case, the effect of the premonition scenario H-4 that notifies a win is executed in the game where there is only one game left in the premonition mode (the final game of the premonition mode), and the progress of the consecutive effects and the progress of the premonition mode are synchronized.

In this way, by configuring the system to additionally execute preliminary effects in games in which the number of remaining games in premonition mode is not updated, the number of games in which consecutive effects are executed is initially set to four, but the duration of the consecutive effects is extended by the two games in which the progress of premonition mode is delayed, and a win notification for CZ mode, etc., can be made in the sixth game from the start of the consecutive effects. This eliminates the discrepancy between the end timing of the premonition mode and the end timing of the consecutive effects caused by the number of remaining games in premonition mode not being updated, and makes it possible to effectively prevent inconveniences such as the push order notification effect for transitioning to AT mode not being executed even though a win notification for AT mode has been made in the consecutive effects.

It is also possible that after the transition to premonition mode and before the start of the continuous effects, the player may play the game with a bet of 2, and the number of games remaining in the premonition mode may not be updated. In this regard, in this embodiment, the display control device 81 is configured to update the values of the premonition counter and the effect waiting counter based on the reception of a premonition game number update command (see Figure 54). Therefore, when the update of the number of games remaining in the premonition mode stops, the update of the number of waiting games until the start of the effect also stops in synchronization. In other words, if the premonition mode is extended because the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is not updated during the period after the transition to premonition mode and before the start of the continuous effects, the start of the continuous effects will be delayed accordingly.

Note that if a player bets two and plays a game while a pseudo-omen continuous effect is being executed, and the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated, a preliminary effect will not be executed, unlike in the case of a main premonition continuous effect. In other words, regardless of the number of bets placed during game execution, the pseudo-omen continuous effect will be executed according to the initial settings. Also, even before the pseudo-omen continuous effect begins, the effect standby counter is updated regardless of the number of bets placed during game execution, and the continuous effect will start in the game according to the initial settings.

Next, with reference to Figure 69, we will explain the flow when a second BB win is achieved during the execution of the consecutive effects for this premonition, and the game transitions to the second BB state. Here, we will explain the example of a case where the player bets two on the second game from the start of the consecutive effects, and stops the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB (Figure 13 (f)) in that game. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51 (b), we will assume that the consecutive effects for this premonition have selected the consecutive effects for this premonition, which is the consecutive effects of four games featuring the warrior character 211.

As already explained, the basic style of play in the slot machine 10 according to this embodiment is to play a 3-bet game in an internal state (carryover state) where the 2nd BB win has occurred. However, since 2-bet game play is also permitted, and a 2nd BB win can occur in a 2-bet game (see FIG. 26), it is expected that the game will transition to the 2nd BB state during the consecutive effects. During the game in which the 2nd BB win occurs (2-bet game) and the transition period to the 2nd BB state (execution period), the number of remaining games in the premonition mode will not be updated (see FIG. 39). In such cases, in this embodiment, the consecutive effects are executed as follows.

When the number of games remaining in the premonition mode reaches four, the start effect of the main premonition scenario H-1 is executed as the main premonition consecutive effect (Figure 69(a)). After that, if the player bets two in the second game after the start of the consecutive effect, the main premonition preliminary scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as a preliminary effect (Figure 69(b)). During that game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB stops and a second BB win is achieved, the consecutive effect that was being executed will be stopped.

Then, from the next game, the system transitions to the second BB state (the second BB bonus game begins), and while the system is transitioning to this BB state, the bonus effect is executed. At this time, the premonition mode flag stored in RAM 106 of the main control device 101 at the start of the bonus game is not cleared but is maintained as is. Also, in the display control device 81, the premonition flag stored in RAM 183 is not cleared but is maintained as is (see Figure 55). In other words, information indicating that the system is in premonition mode is stored internally.

Then, when the second BB state ends and the player starts the next game, the display control device 81 draws a series of effects (the series of effects for this premonition) that can be executed within the number of games remaining in the premonition mode at that time (3 games in the example of Figure 69), and creates a new system data table (see the flow of NO in step S2201, steps S2215, and S2207 in Figure 49). In other words, if the transition to the second BB state occurs in the middle of a series of effects, the series of effects is temporarily stopped, and then a new series of effects is executed as the second BB state ends.

For example, if premonition scenario A (a three-game series featuring girl character 201) is selected as the new consecutive performance, and the player bets three in the game following the end of the second BB state, the performance of premonition scenario A-1 will be executed (Figure 69 (c)). If the player bets three in the second and third games after the start of the new consecutive performance, the final performance (transformation performance) of premonition scenarios A-2 and A-3 set in the scenario data will be executed (Figure 69 (d)). This will result in a win notification for CZ mode, etc.

If the state transitions to the second BB state while a pseudo-premonition sequence is in progress, the sequence will continue (see Figure 57). When the sequence ends, the bonus sequence will be executed for the remaining bonus period.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a two-bet game is played while the consecutive effects for this sign are being played, the game in which the winning announcement is made during the consecutive effects will be delayed.

In this embodiment, if a two-bet game is played during the premonition mode, the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated, and the end game of the premonition mode is delayed. Meanwhile, the consecutive effects for this premonition mode that are executed during the premonition mode are set based on the premonition mode before the extension. Therefore, if the consecutive effects are executed as is, the timing of the winning notification in the consecutive effects will be out of sync with the end of the premonition mode. This can lead to inconveniences such as the player not transitioning to CZ mode or AT mode for a long time, even though a win has been notified by a winning notification during the consecutive effects, raising concerns that this could reduce the player's trust in the effects. In this regard, in this configuration, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of the consecutive effects, the execution game of the winning notification is delayed so that the winning notification is executed in a game later than the originally set execution game of the winning notification. This allows the timing of the winning notification to be delayed in line with the extension of the premonition mode, eliminating the mismatch between the premonition mode and the consecutive effects.

If a two-bet game is played during the execution of the consecutive effects for this premonition, and the premonition mode is extended, a preliminary effect related to the consecutive effects is executed, delaying the execution game of the above-mentioned winning notification.

With this configuration, gaps in the presentation caused by delaying the winning notification can be filled with preliminary effects. In this case, for example, if the preliminary effect is configured to execute an effect unrelated to the continuous presentation, it may give the player the impression that the continuous presentation has suddenly ended. In particular, for players who were watching the continuous presentation in anticipation of a win, this could give the impression that the win has disappeared, which could confuse the player. In this regard, with this configuration, because the preliminary effect executes an effect related to the continuous presentation, it is possible to optimally connect the continuous presentations executed before and after the preliminary presentation with the preliminary effect. This prevents the player from feeling like the continuous presentation has been interrupted, and optimally reduces player confusion.

If a preliminary effect is executed, the subsequent consecutive effects will be executed in the subsequent 3-bet game.

With this configuration, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous performance and the premonition mode is extended, a preliminary performance is inserted in the middle of the continuous performance, and the continuous performance resumes after the preliminary performance is executed. In other words, the continuous performance that would have been executed if the preliminary performance had not been executed is executed after the preliminary performance is executed. For example, in the case of a story-like continuous performance, if part of the continuous performance is missing, the flow of the performance becomes difficult to understand, but with this configuration, this missing performance is avoided. Therefore, the flow of the performance leading up to the winning notification can be maintained in the same way as if the preliminary performance had not been executed. In other words, the timing of the winning notification can be delayed while maintaining consistency in the performance when the preliminary performance is executed and when it is not executed.

Also, for example, it is possible to execute a dedicated effect separate from the continuous effect after executing a preliminary effect, or to not execute a preliminary effect at all and, after a two-bet game has been played, change to a dedicated effect for when the premonition mode is extended. However, because it is not possible to determine in advance when the two-bet game will be played, it becomes necessary to prepare a large number of dedicated effects (e.g., video data for dedicated effects) of different lengths to accommodate any number of games remaining in the premonition mode when a two-bet game is played. This significantly increases the burden on effect design and raises concerns that the increased amount of effect data could strain the storage space for the original continuous effect data and data for other effects. Furthermore, since the setting process must be performed again when a dedicated effect is executed, there is a risk of increasing the processing load on effect control. In this regard, with this configuration, the settings and effect data for continuous effects can be reused, eliminating the need for setting process and preparation of effect data for dedicated effects. This reduces the burden on effect design and the increase in data volume, and also reduces the processing load on effect control.

In addition, if a dedicated effect separate from the continuous effect is executed after a preliminary effect is executed, there is a risk that new measures will be required to deal with what to do if another two-bet game is played while that dedicated effect is being executed, extending the premonition mode. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to deal with this by simply inserting a preliminary effect each time, eliminating the need for new measures. In other words, there is also the advantage of being able to flexibly deal with cases where two-bet games are played multiple times during the execution of a continuous effect.

Multiple types of preliminary effects are prepared according to the type of continuous performance, and when a two-bet game is played and the premonition mode is extended, a preliminary effect corresponding to the type of continuous performance currently being executed is executed. With this configuration, a preliminary effect corresponding to the type of continuous performance currently being executed is executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when a preliminary effect is executed and losing the impression that a continuous performance is in progress. This prevents the player from feeling that the continuous performance has been interrupted, and makes it possible to effectively prevent confusion among the player.

Preliminary effects corresponding to the execution order of each effect during the consecutive effects are prepared, and if a two-bet game is played and the premonition mode is extended, the preliminary effect (the effect of the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-2) corresponding to the execution order of the effect that would have been executed if the two-bet game had not been played (for example, the effect of the actual premonition scenario H-2) is executed. For example, if the same effect was always executed regardless of which game during the consecutive effects the preliminary effect was executed in, there is a concern that the flow of the consecutive effects would be interrupted by the preliminary effect, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or have difficulty understanding the content of the consecutive effects. In this regard, this configuration allows preliminary effects with content that is in line with the flow of the consecutive effects to be executed, thereby effectively preventing the preliminary effect from interrupting the flow of the consecutive effects. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable or having difficulty understanding the content of the consecutive effects, and effectively prevents the preliminary effect from reducing its effectiveness.

The preliminary effects are configured to be executed in the game where two bet games are played. In this case, whenever a one-game delay occurs in the premonition mode, the extended time can be filled with the preliminary effects. Therefore, when the premonition mode is extended in the middle of a continuous effect, it is possible to synchronize the premonition mode and the continuous effect with a simple configuration.

In addition to the consecutive effects, preliminary effects are also set, and the setting process for the preliminary effects is performed in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effects are executed. With this configuration, the preliminary effects are set in advance, so even if a player unexpectedly plays a two-bet game, a quick response is possible and the preliminary effects can be executed smoothly. Furthermore, if a two-bet game is played during a consecutive effect, the control process may be under high load depending on the execution status of other effects. Even in such cases, processing slowdowns can be effectively prevented. Furthermore, in this embodiment, all preliminary effects that can be executed during a consecutive effect are set together at the start of the consecutive effect. This allows for smooth execution of preliminary effects when they are executed in the second or subsequent games of the consecutive effect. In addition, preliminary effects can be executed according to their settings even when they are executed in the starting game (first game) of the consecutive effect.

If a two-bet game is played during the execution of a pseudo-omen continuous effect, the preliminary effect will not be executed. The pseudo-omen continuous effect is executed regardless of the premonition mode, and if a two-bet game is played during the execution of such a continuous effect that is not affected by the premonition mode, the preliminary effect will not be executed. This reduces the frequency of setting and executing the preliminary effect, and reduces the load on the control process.

When the main control unit 101 updates the number of remaining games in the premonition mode, it sends a premonition game count update command indicating this to the display control unit 81.

Since the control processing related to game presentation is entrusted to the display control device 81, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control device 101. However, because the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is managed by the main control device 101, there is a possibility of discrepancies in the recognition of the number of remaining games between the main control device 101 and the display control device 81, raising concerns that the execution game for the win notification may not be appropriately delayed in response to an extension of the premonition mode. In this regard, with this configuration, a premonition game count update command indicating that the number of games remaining in the premonition mode has been updated is output to the display control device 81, allowing the display control device 81 to appropriately determine whether the number of games remaining in the premonition mode has been updated in the main control device 101. As a result, even in a configuration in which processing is shared between the main control device 101 and the display control device 81, discrepancies in the recognition of the number of remaining games are suppressed, making it possible to appropriately delay the execution game for the win notification in response to an extension of the premonition mode.

If the game transitions to the second BB state while the consecutive effects for this precursor are being executed, the ongoing consecutive effects will be stopped and a bonus effect will be executed.

If the system transitions to the second BB state during the execution of this premonition continuous effect, the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated during the execution of the second BB bonus game, and the end of the premonition mode is delayed for a relatively long period of time. Therefore, if the continuous effect continues as is, the premonition mode will end significantly after the winning notification of the continuous effect. In such a case, it is possible to extend the continuous effect by executing preliminary effects for the duration of the bonus game, as in the case where a two-bet game is played during the continuous effect. However, preparing preliminary effects sufficient to fill the bonus game period is not easy, and this could significantly increase the burden on the effect design. To avoid this inconvenience, it is possible to repeatedly execute preliminary effects of a certain length during the bonus game. However, this would not only disrupt the flow of the continuous effect, but could also leave the player feeling bored. In this regard, the present configuration distinguishes between a transition to the second BB state during a continuous effect and a two-bet game, and stops the ongoing continuous effect and executes the bonus effect, thereby effectively preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

If the second BB state is entered while a continuous performance for a real precursor is in progress, the ongoing continuous performance will be stopped. However, if the second BB state is entered while a continuous performance for a pseudo precursor is in progress, the ongoing continuous performance will continue.

In the above configuration, if the second BB state is entered while a continuous effect is in progress, whether or not the continuous effect continues is determined depending on the type of trigger for that continuous effect. Therefore, if the continuous effect is stopped upon entering the second BB state, the player can determine that they have won CZ mode, etc., and if the continuous effect continues, they have not won CZ mode, etc. This allows the player to not only enjoy the unfolding of the continuous effect, but also to enjoy determining whether or not they have won based on whether or not the continuous effect continues.

If the consecutive performances for this premonition are stopped due to the transition to the second BB state, a new consecutive performance for this premonition will be executed within the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the second BB state ends.

In the above configuration, a win is notified by the consecutive presentations following the second BB state. Therefore, even if the consecutive presentations are stopped and a win is not notified due to the transition to the second BB state, the player can still be properly notified of a win. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to continue the interrupted consecutive presentations as the consecutive presentations following the second BB state. However, because the bonus game period is relatively long, the player may not remember the content of the consecutive presentations before the interruption. In such a situation, resuming the consecutive presentations could lead to confusion, as the player would not understand what had begun. In this regard, with this configuration, a new consecutive presentation is executed anew, making it easier for the player to understand and effectively reducing player confusion. Furthermore, because the consecutive presentations are executed in accordance with the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the bonus game ends, the new consecutive presentation can be ended in synchronization with the premonition mode. Therefore, after a win is notified by the consecutive presentations following the bonus game, a prompt transition to a CZ mode, etc., can be made.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, instead of inserting a preliminary effect each time a two-bet game is played, the number of two-bet games played is counted, and effects of a length corresponding to that number of games are executed together at a predetermined timing of the continuous effects. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 70 to 73. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the first embodiment, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

First, the scenario data table for this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 70(a). Here, we will explain the case where main premonition scenario H (a continuous presentation of four games in which warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the presentation scenario for the continuous presentation for this premonition. Note that the scenario data table shown in Figure 70(a) is created in step S2209 of the continuous presentation setting process (Figure 49).

In the scenario data table according to this embodiment, the main premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle is set as a preliminary effect only when the value of the continuous effect counter is 1. In the main premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), text displays 241 and 242 such as "Not yet" or "Battle continues" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 along with the enemy character 212. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(c), an image of the warrior character 211 launching an attack is displayed on the display screen. In other words, the main premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect according to this embodiment is one in which the battle is not concluded and the warrior character 211 launches another attack. The image shown in FIG. 70(c) is executed when the start lever 41 is operated, and switches to the image shown in FIG. 70(b) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or when any of the first (initial) through third (final) stop operations is performed.

<Processing for executing continuous effects>
The continuous performance execution process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 71. This process is executed in step S2115 of the start-time performance setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous performance execution process of Fig. 55. Note that in Fig. 71, processes similar to the continuous performance execution process of Fig. 55 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2503 (the second BB start command has not been received), step S3001 determines whether a premonition game count update command has been received as the current start command. If a premonition game count update command has not been received and the number of remaining games in premonition mode has not been updated in the main control device 101, proceed to step S3002 and add 1 to the value of the preliminary effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. The preliminary effect counter is used by the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of times (number of games) the number of remaining games in premonition mode has not been updated.

After step S3002 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step S3001 (if a premonition game count update command has been received), the process proceeds to step S3003, where it is determined whether the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 is 1. The continuous effect counter is used by the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the continuous effect, and this step is intended to determine whether the timing is right to start the game when the number of games remaining in the continuous effect is 1.

If it is determined that the value of the continuous performance counter is not 1, the process proceeds to step S3004, where the performance of the main premonition scenario corresponding to the current value of the continuous performance counter is executed based on the scenario data for the main premonition set in the continuous performance setting process (Figure 49). For example, as shown in Figure 70(a), if main premonition scenario H is set as the continuous performance for the main premonition and the current value of the continuous performance counter is 3, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that the performance of main premonition scenario H-2 is executed in the current game. In the following step S3005, the value of the continuous performance counter is decremented by 1, and then the process for executing the main premonition scenario is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3003 above, that is, if the timing is right to start a game when there is only one game remaining in the continuous effect, the preliminary effect processing is executed in step S3006, and then the continuous effect execution processing is terminated. In the preliminary effect processing in step S3006, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 72, it is first determined in step S3101 whether the value of the preliminary effect counter is 1 or greater.

If it is determined that the value of the preliminary effect counter is 1 or greater, in step S3102, the preliminary effect set in the scenario data table (the effect of the main premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle) is executed. In the following step S3103, the value of the preliminary effect counter is decremented by 1, and then the preliminary effect processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3101 (the value of the preliminary effect counter is 0), then in step S3104, based on the scenario data table, the performance of the main premonition scenario (main premonition scenario H-4) when the value of the continuous effect counter is 1 is executed. In the following step S3105, the value of the continuous effect counter is decremented by 1, and then the preliminary effect processing is terminated.

<About the flow of consecutive performances>
Next, the flow of the continuous effects for this premonition in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 73. Here, we will explain an example in which the player bets 2 in the second and fifth games from the start of the continuous effects, and the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated in those games. Also, it is assumed that the continuous effects for this premonition have selected the main premonition scenario H, as shown in Figure 70(a).

When the number of games remaining in the premonition mode reaches four, the start effect of main premonition scenario H-1 is executed as the main premonition consecutive effect (Figure 73 (a)). Then, if the player bets two in the second game from the start of the consecutive effects, a preliminary effect is executed in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, an item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of main premonition scenario H-2, which is a continuation of the start effect, is executed (Figure 73 (b)). At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is incremented by one (step S3002 in Figure 71), and the counter value becomes one. Thereafter, if the player bets three in the third game from the start of the consecutive effects, the effect of main premonition scenario H-3 (battle effect) is executed (Figure 73 (c)).

Then, when the player bets 3 and plays the fourth game from the start of the consecutive effects (a game in which the consecutive effect counter value is 1 at the start of the game), the actual premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect set in the scenario data table is executed (Figures 73 (d) and (e)). At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is decremented by 1 (step S3103 in Figure 72), and the counter value becomes 0. Note that when a preliminary effect is executed, the value of the consecutive effect counter is not updated (the flow when a negative judgment is made in step S3101 in Figure 72), so the counter value remains 1.

After that, if the player bets two again and plays the fifth game from the start of the consecutive effects, the value of the preliminary effect counter will be incremented by one, and the counter value will once again become 1. As a result, the premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect will be executed in that game. At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter will be decremented by one, and the counter value will once again become 0.

Then, when the player plays the sixth game from the start of the consecutive effects with a bet of 3, the effect of this premonition scenario H-4 set in the scenario data is executed (Figure 73 (f)), and a win notification for CZ mode, etc. is made. In this case, the effect of this premonition scenario H-4 that notifies a win is executed in the game where there is only one game left in the premonition mode (the final game in the premonition mode), and the progress of the consecutive effects and the progress of the premonition mode are synchronized.

If the system transitions to the second BB state while a continuous effect, including a preliminary effect, is in progress, the continuous effect will be stopped, as in the first embodiment. At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter will be cleared to 0.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a two-bet game is played during a continuous effect, the preliminary effect is not executed immediately, but rather in a game following the two-bet game.

With this configuration, as with the first embodiment, the timing of the winning notification can be delayed in line with the extension of the premonition mode, eliminating the discrepancy between the premonition mode and the continuous effects. Furthermore, with the above configuration, if the end of the premonition mode is delayed due to a two-bet game, the continuation of the continuous effects takes priority, and the preliminary effects are executed later. In this case, by setting the game in which the preliminary effects are executed at a convenient point in the development of the continuous effects, it is possible to prevent the preliminary effects from being inserted at an awkward point, regardless of the timing of the two-bet game. Therefore, by optimally combining the continuous effects and the preliminary effects, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that looks good, even when the length of the continuous effects is changed in line with the delay in the premonition mode.

The system is designed to track the number of two-bet games played during the execution of consecutive effects (number of delay games in premonition mode), and execute a series of preliminary effects equal to the number of games (delay) that have been tracked.

For example, if two-bet games are played multiple times during the execution of a continuous effect, preliminary effects may be inserted multiple times during the continuous effect, causing frequent interruptions to the progress of the continuous effect. In this regard, with this configuration, preliminary effects for which the end of the premonition mode is delayed are executed all at once, minimizing interruptions to the continuous effect caused by preliminary effects. This effectively prevents the player from understanding the development of the effect.

A preliminary effect counter is provided to track the number of games in which the preliminary effects are executed, and is updated each time one game's worth of preliminary effects is executed. In this case, it is possible to appropriately execute the number of preliminary effects corresponding to the extension. Furthermore, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a preliminary effect, the value of the preliminary effect counter is incremented. This makes it possible to increase the number of games in which the preliminary effects are executed when a two-bet game is played during the preliminary effect. Therefore, even if the premonition mode is further extended by a two-bet game during the preliminary effect, the winning notification can be delayed accordingly, making it possible to synchronize the consecutive effects and the premonition mode.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous performance for a real premonition, the continuous performance continues, and if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous performance for a pseudo premonition, the continuous performance is stopped. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 to 77. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are assigned the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

First, the scenario data table for this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 74(a). Here, we will explain the case where main premonition scenario H (a continuous presentation of four games in which warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the presentation scenario for the continuous presentation for this premonition. Note that the scenario data table shown in Figure 74(a) is created in step S2209 of the continuous presentation setting process (Figure 49).

In the scenario data table for this embodiment, only the main premonition scenarios H-1 to H-4 are set, and no backup scenarios are set. In other words, in this embodiment, if a player starts a game with a bet of 2 while a continuous effect is being executed (if the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated), the backup effect will not be executed.

<Processing for executing continuous effects>
The continuous performance execution process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 75. This process is executed in step S2115 of the start-time performance setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous performance execution process of Fig. 55. Note that in Fig. 75, processes similar to the continuous performance execution process of Fig. 55 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2501 (if the continuous effect flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S3201, where it is determined whether a pseudo-omen flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The pseudo-omen flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine whether a continuous effect for a pseudo-omen (a continuous effect that notifies of a non-winning performance in CZ mode, etc.) should be executed or is currently being executed.

If it is determined that the pseudo premonition flag is stored, then in step S3202 it is determined whether a premonition game count update command has been received as the current start command. If the premonition game count update command has not been received and the number of remaining games in premonition mode has not been updated in the main control device 101, then the process proceeds to step S3203, where the pseudo premonition flag is cleared (erased). In the following step S3204, the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 is cleared to 0. The continuous effect counter is used by the CPU 181 to determine the number of remaining games in the continuous effect.

After step S3204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2508, where the scenario data table (performance data for continuous performance) stored in the performance setting data storage area 183c of RAM 183 is cleared (erased). In the following step S2509, the continuous performance flags stored in the various flag storage area 183a are cleared (erased), and then the continuous performance execution process is terminated. This stops the ongoing continuous performance (continuous performance for pseudo-premonition).

If a positive judgment is made in step S3202 (if the premonition game count update command has been received) or a negative judgment is made in step S3201 (if the actual premonition flag is stored), step S3205 determines whether a second BB start command has been received as the current start command. If a second BB start command has not been received, proceed to step S3206, where the actual premonition scenario or pseudo premonition scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous performance counter at that time is executed based on the scenario data set in the continuous performance setting process (Figure 49). In the following step S3207, the value of the continuous performance counter is decremented by 1, and then the continuous performance execution process is terminated.

<Bonus performance setting process>
The bonus effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 74(b). This process is executed in step S2112 of the start effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed instead of the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 57.

In the bonus effect setting process, first in step S3301, it is determined whether a first BB start command or a second BB start command has been received as the current start command. If a first BB start command or a second BB start command has been received, in step S3302, a process is performed to determine the current bonus type. Specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on a first BB win or a second BB win.

In the following step S3303, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type determined in step S3302 is set. After step S3303 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3301, the bonus effect setting process is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, if a second BB win occurs during the execution of the consecutive effects for the pseudo-premonition and the state transitions to the second BB state, the consecutive effects will not be continued.

<About the flow of consecutive performances>
Next, the flow of the continuous effects for this premonition in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 76. Here, we will explain an example in which the player bets 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous effects, and the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated in that game. Also, it is assumed that the continuous effects for this premonition have selected the main premonition scenario H, as shown in Figure 74(a).

When the number of games remaining in the premonition mode reaches four, the start effect of main premonition scenario H-1 is executed as the main premonition consecutive effect (Figure 76 (a)). Then, if the player bets two on the second game from the start of the consecutive effects, a preliminary effect is executed in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, an item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of main premonition scenario H-2, which is a continuation of the start effect, is executed.

If the player then bets 3 in the third and fourth games from the start of the consecutive effects and plays the game, the effects (battle effects) of the premonition scenarios H-3 and H-4 are executed (Figure 76 (b)), and a win in the CZ mode or similar is announced. However, because the number of games remaining in the premonition mode was not updated in the second game from the start of the consecutive effects, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is 1 at the end of the fourth game (the game in which the win was announced).

In such a situation, if the player bets three on the fifth game from the start of the consecutive effects, a standby effect is executed to fill the remaining number of games in the surplus premonition mode. In this embodiment, a win notification effect such as CZ mode is executed as the standby effect. Figure 76 shows a case where an AT win notification effect (Figure 66(a)) is executed as the win notification effect (Figure 76(c)). Note that whether to execute a win notification effect corresponding to CZ mode, AT mode, or an additional number of games in AT mode is determined by determining the type of win based on the various win commands (CZ win command, AT win command, AT additional command) sent from the main control device 101, and selecting based on the result.

If the player then bets 3 on the sixth game from the start of the continuous effects, the number of remaining games in the premonition mode will be 0, so the main control device 101 will send a CZ start command, a first AT winning notification command, a second AT winning notification command, etc. (Figures 41 and 42). The display control device 81 will continue the winning notification effects to notify the player of the winning based on these commands (Figure 76 (d)).

Next, the flow of the consecutive effects for pseudo-omen in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 77. Here, we will explain an example in which the player bets two on the third game from the start of the consecutive effects. Also, we will assume that pseudo-omen scenario F in Figure 53 (a consecutive effect of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) has been selected as the consecutive effects for pseudo-omen.

When the value of the effect standby counter (Figure 54) reaches 0, the start effect of pseudo-omen scenario F-1 is executed as a pseudo-omen continuous effect (Figure 77(a)). Thereafter, if the player bets 3 in the second game after the start of the continuous effects, the effect of pseudo-omen scenario F-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as a preparation effect (item acquisition effect) (Figure 77(b)). Thereafter, if the player bets 2 in the third game after the start of the continuous effects, the pseudo-omen continuous effect is stopped and a normal effect different from the previous effect is executed. In this case, the continuous effect is stopped at the start of the third game (when the start lever 41 is operated with the bet set to 2).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous performance for a real premonition, the ongoing continuous performance will continue, but if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous performance for a pseudo premonition, the ongoing continuous performance will be stopped.

In the above configuration, if a two-bet game is played while a continuous effect is in progress, whether or not the continuous effect continues is determined depending on the type of trigger for that continuous effect. Therefore, if the continuous effect is not stopped even when a player plays a two-bet game and continues as is, it is possible to determine that the player has won CZ mode, etc., and if the continuous effect is stopped, it is possible to determine that the player has not won CZ mode, etc. This makes it possible to not only enjoy the unfolding of the continuous effect, but also to enjoy determining whether or not the continuous effect continues.

If the premonition mode is extended by one game due to a two-bet game, the ongoing continuous effect (the continuous effect for this premonition) will continue, but if the premonition mode is extended over multiple games due to a transition to the second BB state, the ongoing continuous effect will be stopped. In other words, the configuration switches between continuing or stopping the continuous effect depending on the length of time during which the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated.

With this configuration, if the premonition mode is extended for a short period while a continuous performance is in progress, the discrepancy between the end of the premonition mode and the timing of the winning notification is deemed to be within an acceptable range, and the continuation of the continuous performance is prioritized. On the other hand, if the premonition mode is extended for a long period while a continuous performance is in progress, the discrepancy is deemed to be non-negligible, and the continuous performance is stopped and forcibly terminated so that the winning notification is not executed. This configuration increases the opportunities for the continuous performance to continue, while preventing performance inconsistencies from occurring even if there is a period of time after the performance ends without transitioning to CZ mode, etc. Therefore, compared to a configuration that always continues the continuous performance or always stops the continuous performance, it is possible to more appropriately deal with events in which the premonition mode is extended while a continuous performance is in progress.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, if a BB win occurs during the execution of the continuous performance for the real premonition, the ongoing continuous performance is switched to the continuous performance for the pseudo premonition. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 81. In these figures, the same symbols are used for components similar to those in the above embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

In this embodiment, to facilitate understanding of the characteristic configuration, the configuration for the continuous performance for real premonitions and the continuous performance for pseudo premonitions is as follows. If a two-bet game is played while the continuous performance for real premonitions is being executed, the preliminary performance is not executed, as in the third embodiment above. Furthermore, if the state transitions to the second BB state while the continuous performance for pseudo premonitions is being executed, the continuous performance takes priority over the bonus performance, and the continuous performance continues until the final game of the continuous performance is completed, as in the first embodiment above.

<Bonus performance setting process>
The bonus effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 78. This process is executed in step S2112 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed instead of the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 57. In Fig. 78, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 57, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2702 (if the first BB start command or second BB command has been received), step S3301 determines whether this precursor flag is stored in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. This precursor flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that precursor mode is being executed.

If it is determined that the present premonition flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3302, where it is determined whether a continuous performance flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The continuous performance flag allows the CPU 181 to determine whether a continuous performance should be executed or is currently being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S3301 and then again in step S3302, this indicates that a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state has occurred during the execution of a continuous performance that notifies a player of a win, such as CZ mode. In this case, the type of continuous performance currently being executed is determined in step S3303. For example, as shown in the scenario data table in FIG. 79(a), if the continuous performance of present premonition scenario H (a four-game continuous performance featuring warrior character 211) is currently being executed, present premonition scenario H is determined as the type of continuous performance. This scenario data table is created in step S2209 of the continuous performance setting process (FIG. 49) and is stored in the performance setting data storage area 183c of RAM 183.

In the following step S3304, the number of games remaining for the continuous effects is determined based on the value of the continuous effects counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. Next, in step S3305, the pseudo-omen effect table (Figure 53) stored in the various table storage area of ROM 182 is obtained.

Then, in step S3306, pseudo-omen effect data corresponding to the continuation of the continuous effects is set in the scenario data table. In processing this step, the progress of the ongoing continuous effects is first determined based on the type of continuous effects determined in step S3303 and the number of games remaining in the continuous effect determined in step S3304. For example, if the number of games remaining in the continuous effect is two while main omen scenario H is determined, it is determined that the game has progressed to the preparatory effect (item acquisition effect) of main omen scenario H-2. Then, based on the pseudo-omen effect table, information for the pseudo-omen scenarios H-3 and H-4 (battle effects for pseudo-omen) is set in the scenario data table as the effect following the preparatory effect (final effect). The information for these pseudo-omen scenarios H-3 and H-4 is set to correspond to the continuous effect counter values of 2 and 1, respectively, as shown in Figure 79(b). As a result, the scenario data table is changed so that pseudo-omen scenarios H-3 and H-4 are executed as the effects for the third and fourth games of the consecutive effects.

In step S3307, the value of the continuous performance counter that was being managed during the execution of the continuous performance for the main premonition is carried over as the value for the continuous performance for the pseudo premonition. Note that this step is described for the sake of convenience, and the processing simply involves not clearing the value of the continuous performance counter at that time. Then, in step S3308, the pseudo premonition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. As a result, both the main premonition flag and the pseudo premonition flag are stored in the various flag storage area 183a. After step S3308 is executed, the bonus performance setting processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3301 (if the premonition mode is not in progress) or if a negative judgment is made in step S3302 (if continuous effects are not in progress), the process proceeds to step S2703, where the current bonus type is determined. In the following step S2704, the bonus effects corresponding to the determined bonus type are set, and then the bonus effect setting process ends.

<Processing for executing continuous effects>
The continuous effect execution process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 80(a). This process is executed in step S2115 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of Fig. 55.

In the continuous performance execution process, first in step S3401, it is determined whether a continuous performance flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that a continuous performance flag is not stored, this continuous performance execution process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous performance flag is set, i.e., if a continuous performance is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3302, where the actual premonition scenario or pseudo-premonition scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous performance counter is executed based on the scenario data set at that time. For example, if the performance counter value is 1, and the scenario data table is not rewritten in step S3306 of the bonus performance setting process (FIG. 78) and the scenario data table is in the state shown in FIG. 79(a), control is exercised to execute the performance of the actual premonition scenario H-4, and a performance image in which the warrior character 211 wins is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. On the other hand, if the scenario data table is changed to the state shown in FIG. 79(b) in step S3306, control is exercised to execute the performance of the pseudo-premonition scenario H-4, and a performance image in which the warrior character 211 is defeated is displayed on the display screen. After step S3402 is executed, step S3403 decrements the value of the continuous performance counter by 1, and then the continuous performance execution process ends.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The flow of the processing for setting the effects when all reels stop in this embodiment is the same as the processing for setting the effects when all reels stop in the first embodiment (Figure 56), but the processing for when the continuous effects that have been changed to a scenario for pseudo-premonitions as a result of the start of the second BB state have ended will be explained again with reference to the flowchart in Figure 80 (b).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2611 (if the premonition end command has not been received), step S2614 determines whether the value of the continuous performance counter is 0, i.e., whether the continuous performance has ended. If it is determined that the value of the continuous performance counter is 0 (if the continuous performance has ended), proceed to step S2615, where the pseudo premonition flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared (erased). As already explained, if the second BB state is initiated while the continuous performance for the main premonition is being executed and the continuous performance is switched to the pseudo premonition continuous performance, the various flag storage area 183a will contain the main premonition flag and the pseudo premonition flag. By executing the pseudo premonition flag clearing process in this step, only the main premonition flag will be stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

In step S2616, the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared (erased), and in the following step S2617, it is determined whether the second BB state is being executed. If it is determined that the second BB state is being executed, the pseudo premonition end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the process proceeds to step S2621 (other all-stop effect setting process).

When the pseudo premonition end flag is set in this way, in the bonus performance setting process of FIG. 78, a positive judgment is made in the judgment process of step S2706 (process for determining whether the pseudo premonition end flag is stored). Then, in step S2707, the pseudo premonition end flag is cleared (erased), and the process proceeds to step S2703. In step S2703, a process for determining the current bonus type is performed, and in the following step S2704, a bonus performance corresponding to the determined bonus type is set. In other words, if the ongoing continuous performance is changed to a pseudo premonition scenario upon the start of the second BB state, the bonus performance will be executed after the continuous performance ends.

<Continuous performance setting process>
The flow of the continuous performance setting process in this embodiment is the same as the continuous performance setting process in the first embodiment (Figure 49), but the processing related to the case where the second BB state is started during the execution of the continuous performance for this precursor and then the second BB state ends will be explained again with reference to the flowchart in Figure 80 (c).

In the continuous effect setting process, first in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received, i.e., whether or not the BB state has ended. If it is determined that the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received (if the BB state has ended), the process proceeds to step S2215, where it is determined whether or not the actual premonition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. As described above, if the continuous effect (continuous effect changed to a pseudo scenario) ends in the middle of the second BB state, only the pseudo premonition flag is cleared in step S2615 of the all-stop effect setting process (Figure 80 (b)), and the actual premonition flag remains stored in the various flag storage area 183a. In this case, a positive determination is made in this step.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2215, in step S2207, a process is executed to obtain the premonition effect table from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and then the processes from step S2208 onwards are executed. In this case, in step S2210, the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0 (if it is already 0, it is left as is), and settings are made so that the continuous effect will start immediately. As a result, as the second BB state ends, a new continuous effect will be executed within the number of games remaining in the premonition mode.

<About the flow of consecutive performances>
Next, the flow of the continuous effects for this premonition in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 81. Here, we will explain an example in which a player bets two on the second game from the start of the continuous effects and wins the second BB in that game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the continuous effects for this premonition have selected the main premonition scenario H, as shown in Figure 79(a).

When the number of games remaining in the premonition mode reaches four, the start effect of this premonition scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for this premonition (Figure 81 (a)). Then, if the player bets two on the second game after the start of the continuous effect, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is not updated, but in this embodiment, the item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this premonition scenario H-2, which is a continuation of the start effect, is executed.

During the second game, if the player operates one of the stop switches 42-44 at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB (Figure 13(f)) stops, the second BB win is achieved, and the bonus game corresponding to the second BB starts from the next game. If the player bets three and operates the start lever 41 in the third game after the start of the consecutive effects (the start game of the bonus game), that game starts, and accordingly, the effects of the third game and subsequent games of the consecutive effects are changed to the pseudo-premonition scenario effects in the scenario data table set in the effect setting data storage area 183c of RAM 183 (Figure 79(b)). In other words, the bonus game starts when the start lever 41 is operated, but the bonus effect is not executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and instead the battle effect of the pseudo-premonition scenario H-3 is executed as a continuation of the consecutive effects.

In addition, in the above case, the premonition mode flag stored in RAM 106 of the main control device 101 at the start of the bonus game is not cleared but is maintained as is. Also, in the display control device 81, the premonition flag stored in RAM 183 is not cleared but is maintained as is. In other words, information indicating that the premonition mode is in progress is stored internally.

Then, if the player bets three and plays the fourth game (the second bonus game) from the start of the consecutive effects, the defeat effect of pseudo-premonition scenario H-4 set in the changed scenario data table will be executed (Figure 81 (b)). This will end the consecutive effects with a non-winning notification being issued in CZ mode, etc. After that, if the player bets three and plays the next game, a bonus effect will be executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. This bonus effect will continue until timing t1, when the second BB bonus game ends.

When the bonus game ends at timing t1 and the player bets 3 and plays the next game, the display control device 81 draws a series of effects (the series of effects for this premonition) that can be executed within the number of games remaining in the premonition mode at that time (3 games in the example of Figure 81), and creates a new system data table (see the flow of NO in step S2201, steps S2215, and S2207 in Figure 80(a)). In this case, the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0, so the series of effects set in the new system data table are executed in that game (the game next after the bonus game). In other words, when the second BB state ends, a new series of effects is executed within the number of games remaining in the premonition mode.

For example, if premonition scenario A (a three-game series featuring girl character 201) is selected as the new consecutive performance, and the player bets three in the game following the end of the second BB state, the performance of premonition scenario A-1 will be executed (Figure 81 (c)). If the player bets three in the second and third games after the start of the new consecutive performance, the final performance (transformation performance) of premonition scenarios A-2 and A-3 set in the scenario data will be executed (Figure 81 (d)). This will result in a win notification for CZ mode, etc.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the second BB state is entered while the consecutive effects for this precursor are being performed, the consecutive effects will be deactivated and a notification will be issued.

When a transition to the second BB bonus game occurs, the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated throughout that bonus game, significantly extending the premonition mode. In this case, for example, if the continuous performance continues as is, it could result in a situation where the mode does not transition to CZ mode or the like for a long period of time, even though a win notification has been issued in that performance, raising concerns that this could reduce the player's trust in the performance. As a result, the continuous performance could not be continued. In this regard, this configuration changes the presentation mode of the continuous performance so that a loss notification is issued, making the player believe that they have lost. This effectively prevents the occurrence of presentation inconsistencies even if there is a period of time after the end of the continuous performance without transitioning to CZ mode or the like. Therefore, it is possible to continue the continuous performance even if the premonition mode is extended during the continuous performance.

If the second BB state is entered while a sequence of real premonition effects is in progress, the remaining sequence of effects will be replaced with a sequence of pseudo premonition effects.

This pseudo-omen continuous effect (the continuous effect for announcing a loss), like the continuous succession of real omen effects (the continuous effect for announcing a win), was originally configured as a continuous effect. Therefore, by utilizing the pseudo-omen continuous effect as the changed continuous effect, it is possible to smoothly connect the previous continuous effect and the changed continuous effect. This prevents an unnatural impression from appearing, making it difficult for players to notice that the presentation mode of the continuous effect has changed. This makes it easier for players to believe they have lost, and more appropriately ensures consistency with the period of time after the end of the effect when there is no transition to CZ mode, etc. Furthermore, because part of the pseudo-omen continuous effect is reused, there is no need to create a dedicated effect for the change. This reduces the design burden associated with creating dedicated effects and also saves ROM capacity for storing effect data.

In the above case, a pseudo-premonition sequence corresponding to the type of real premonition sequence that was being executed before the transition to the second BB state is used. In this case, it is difficult to tell that the real premonition sequence has switched to a pseudo-premonition sequence midway through, making it possible to effectively prevent the player from feeling unnatural.

Furthermore, if the second BB state is entered while a main precursor sequence is in progress, the progress of that sequence is tracked and replaced with a corresponding pseudo-precursor sequence, making it difficult for the player to distinguish the boundary between the pre-change and post-change states. This makes it even more difficult for the player to notice that the main precursor sequence has switched to a pseudo-precursor sequence in the middle of the sequence, effectively making the player believe they've missed a bet.

If the transition to the second BB state causes the continuous performance to be canceled and changed to a notification mode, the continuous performance that notifies the player of a win will be executed after the second BB state ends.

In a configuration in which the transition to the second BB state changes the presentation mode of the consecutive effects to a miss notification, the winning notification that would have been made is canceled. As a result, if the update of the remaining number of games in the premonition mode resumes after the second BB state, there is a concern that the player may be confused by the transition to CZ mode or the like without being notified of the win. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the presentation mode of the consecutive effects is changed to a miss notification, a winning notification can be made in the consecutive effects executed after the second BB state. This allows the player to be properly notified of the win, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

When a continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, it is configured to be executed for the number of games remaining in the premonition mode. This allows the continuous effect after the bonus game to end in synchronization with the end of the premonition mode. Therefore, after a win is announced in the continuous effect after the bonus game, it is possible to quickly transition to CZ mode, etc.

When a continuous effect is executed after the second BB state ends, a new continuous effect is executed anew. In this case, the continuous effect that was executed when transitioning to the second BB state (the continuous effect that was executed when the change occurred) and the continuous effect that occurs after the second BB state are clearly distinguished, which effectively prevents players from confusing the two.

Fifth Embodiment
In each of the above-described embodiments, after the bonus game ends, a new continuous effect is executed within the number of games remaining in the premonition mode. However, if the number of remaining games is small, there may be an insufficient number of games, making it difficult to execute a new continuous effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, a new continuous effect is started before the bonus game ends. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 84. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the above-described embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

<Bonus performance setting process>
The bonus effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 82. This process is executed in step S2112 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed instead of the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 78. In Fig. 82, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 78, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2705, i.e., if the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, step S2706 determines whether a pseudo premonition end flag is stored in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that a pseudo premonition end flag is not stored, proceed to step S4001, where it determines whether the number of games remaining in the premonition mode at that time is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games.

The predetermined number of games in this step can be, for example, the number of games required to execute the continuous effect minus one game, and in this embodiment, it can be two games. In the following explanation, the predetermined number of games will be assumed to be two games. Furthermore, since the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is not updated while the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed (Figure 39), the number of remaining games in the premonition mode when this step is executed is essentially the number of remaining games in the premonition mode when the bonus game has ended.

If the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is the specified number of games (2 games) or less, proceed to step S4002 and determine whether or not the current game is the final game of the bonus game. This determination is made by identifying the winning combination (minor combination) for the current game based on the winning result command sent from the main control unit 101, and determining whether the number of medals paid out if that winning combination is achieved is equal to or greater than the number of medals remaining up to the maximum payout limit for the bonus game (46 medals). For example, if the winning combination for the current game is a common bell (13 medals paid out when won), and the number of medals remaining up to the maximum payout limit is 13 or less, the current game is determined to be the final game of the bonus game.

If it is determined that this is the final game of the bonus game, in step S4003, 1 is added to the number of remaining games in the premonition mode determined in step S4002, and this is determined as the number of games for which consecutive effects will be executed. Next, in step S4004, a main premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and then in step S4005, a lottery process for consecutive effects is executed. In step S4005, consecutive effects that can be executed within the number of games executed determined in step S4003 above are executed. For example, if the number of games executed determined in step S4003 above is 3, main premonition scenario A or main premonition scenario B, which can be executed in 3 games, is determined by lottery from the various scenarios set in the main premonition effect table of FIG. 50.

After step S4005 is executed, in step S4006, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created, and in the following step S4007, a value is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. The continuous effect counter is used to count the number of games in which continuous effects have been executed or the number of games remaining. For example, if the number of games executed determined in step S4003 above is 3, the value of the continuous effect counter is set to 3. Also, in step S4007, the value of the effect standby counter provided in the various counter area 183b is set to 0 (or if it is already 0, it is left as is), setting the continuous effect to start immediately. The effect standby counter is used by the CPU 181 to determine the number of games in standby before the continuous effect starts.

The processing of steps S4002 to S4007 executes the setting process for executing a continuous effect at the start of the final bonus game. After step S4007 is executed, in step S4008, a start-before-end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. The start-before-end flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that a continuous effect has started before the end of the bonus game.

After step S4008 is executed, the bonus effect setting process ends. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in either step S4001 or step S4002 (if the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is more than two or less, or if the current game is not the final bonus game), the bonus effect setting process ends without executing the processes from step S4003 onwards.

<Continuous performance setting process>
The continuous effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 83(a). This process is executed in step S2113 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect setting process of Fig. 49. Note that in Fig. 83(a), processes similar to those in the continuous effect setting process of Fig. 49 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In the continuous output setting process, first in step S2201, it is determined whether the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received, i.e., whether the BB state has ended. If it is determined that the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received (if the BB state has ended), the process proceeds to step S2215, where it is determined whether this precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

If it is determined that the main premonition flag is stored, i.e., if the game will transition to premonition mode after the bonus game ends, proceed to step S4101, where it is determined whether a pre-end start flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that the pre-end start flag is not stored, i.e., if a continuous effect (a main premonition continuous effect) has not started before the bonus game ends, step S2207 executes processing to obtain a main premonition effect table from the various table storage area 182a in ROM 182, and then executes processing from step S2208 onwards. In other words, as the second BB state ends, a new continuous effect is executed within the number of games remaining in premonition mode.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4101 (the pre-end start flag is not stored), the continuous effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes from step S2207 onwards. In other words, if the continuous effect has started before the end of the bonus game, the process for setting the continuous effect at the end of the bonus game is not executed.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 83(b). This process is executed in step S1910 of the effect setting process (Fig. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 56. In Fig. 83(b), the same steps as those in the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 56 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2611 (if a premonition end command has been received), i.e., if the premonition mode has ended, the main premonition flag and continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183 are cleared (deleted) in steps S2612 and S2613. In the following step S4201, it is determined whether a start before end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a, and if it is determined that a start before end flag is stored, the start before end flag is cleared (deleted) in step S4202. After execution of step S4202 or if a negative judgment is made in step S4201 (if the start before end flag is not stored), the other all-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2621.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2614 (if the value of the continuous effect counter is not 0), step S2619 determines whether a first BB end command or a second BB end command has been received as the current full stop command. If it is determined that one of these commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S4203, where it determines whether a start before end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that the start before end flag is not stored (if the continuous effect has not started before the end of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S2620, where the bonus end effect is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start before end flag is stored (if the continuous effect has started before the end of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S26212 without executing step S2620. In other words, if the continuous effect has started before the end of the bonus game, the bonus end effect is not executed.

<About the flow of consecutive performances>
Next, the flow of the continuous effects for this premonition in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 84. Here, we will explain an example in which the player bets two on the third game from the start of the continuous effects and wins the second BB in that game. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 79(a), it is assumed that the continuous effects for this premonition have selected the main premonition scenario H (a continuous effect of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears).

In addition, here, if the transition to the second BB state occurs while a continuous performance is being executed, the performance will change to a pseudo-premonition scenario, and the continuous performance will continue, just as in the fourth embodiment above. Note that the flow of the continuous performance in this case is the same as explained in the fourth embodiment above, so explanations will be omitted or simplified as appropriate.

When the number of games remaining in the premonition mode reaches four, the start effect of this premonition scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for this premonition (Figure 84 (a)). After that, if the player bets three on the second game from the start of the continuous effect, the item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this premonition scenario H-2 is executed.

Then, in the third game from the start of the consecutive effects, if the player bets 2 and operates each of the stop switches 42-44 at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to 2BB (FIG. 13(f)) stops in that game, a second BB win is achieved and the bonus game corresponding to second BB starts from the next game. Since the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is not updated in the game in which the second BB win is achieved (the game in which the bet is 2, the third game from the start of the consecutive effects) and the starting game of the bonus game corresponding to second BB, in the example shown in FIG. 84, the bonus game starts with two games remaining in the premonition mode.

In this embodiment, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is updated at the start of the game, so although the bonus game is started when the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is three as shown in Figure 84, the actual number of games remaining is two. This is consistent with the fact that the bonus game starts when there are four games remaining in the premonition mode (when the consecutive effects start) and two three-bet games have been played (when there are two games remaining in the consecutive effects).

After that, when the final game of the bonus game is reached at timing t1, the display control device 81 draws a series of effects (the series of effects for this premonition) that can be executed within the number of games obtained by adding one game to the number of remaining games in the premonition mode at that time (three games in the example of Figure 84), and creates a new system data table (YES in step S4001, YES in step S4002, steps S4003 to S4008 in Figure 82). In this case, the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0, and the series of effects set in the new system data table are executed in that game (the final game of the bonus game). In other words, a new series of effects begins prior to the end of the second BB state.

For example, if premonition scenario A (a three-game series featuring girl character 201) is selected as the new consecutive presentation, the presentation of premonition scenario A-1 will be executed in the final bonus game (Figure 84 (c)). Then, when the bonus game ends at timing t2 and the player then bets three and plays the next game, the presentation of premonition scenario A-2 set in the scenario data will be executed. Then, when the player then bets three in the third game from the start of the new consecutive presentation, the presentation of premonition scenario A-3 will be executed and a win notification for the CZ mode, etc. will be issued (Figure 84 (d)).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a continuous effect is executed using the remaining premonition modes after the second BB state, the continuous effect is configured to start before the end of the second BB state.

Depending on the timing of the transition to the second BB state, there may be a small number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the second BB state ends. In this case, the insufficient number of games may make it difficult to execute consecutive effects. It is also possible to create a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but this raises concerns that this would increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with creating the dedicated effect. In this regard, with this configuration, consecutive effects begin before the end of the second BB state, so it is possible to ensure that the number of games for which consecutive effects are executed is greater than the actual number of games remaining. This prevents consecutive effects from being unable to be executed properly due to an insufficient number of games, or from increasing the processing load and design burden associated with dedicated effects, making it possible to optimally execute consecutive effects using the remaining premonition mode after the second BB state.

The system checks the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the end of the second BB state, and if the number of remaining games is less than a predetermined number, it starts a continuous effect before the end of the second BB state.

For example, if the continuous effects were to be uniformly started before the end of the second BB state, there is a concern that the continuous effects would be unnecessarily long, causing the player to feel dragged out. In this regard, with this configuration, the continuous effects will start early only if there are insufficient games remaining in the premonition mode. This makes it possible to optimally implement continuous effects using the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the second BB state, while preventing the duration of the continuous effects from being unnecessarily long.

The remaining payout number for the second BB bonus game is determined, and the number of remaining games is determined from the result. If the number of remaining games falls below a predetermined number, a continuous effect will begin.

When starting a continuous effect before the end of a bonus game, for example, if the timing of starting the continuous effect is too early, the continuous effect may end before the remaining premonition mode after the bonus game has elapsed. Conversely, if the timing of starting the continuous effect is too late, the continuous effect may exceed the premonition mode. In this regard, with this configuration, the number of remaining games is determined (estimated) by referencing the remaining payout number for each bonus game, and the timing of starting the continuous effect is determined based on that result. This allows the continuous effect to be started at an appropriate time in relation to the number of games remaining in the second BB state, making it possible to optimally implement a continuous effect that is appropriate for both the number of games remaining in the second BB state and the number of games remaining in the premonition mode.

In particular, this embodiment is configured to start the continuous effects in the final game of a bonus game. In a bonus game that ends when the number of medals paid out reaches the maximum payout number, the number of games to be played is not uniquely determined. However, if a winning combination is drawn during a bonus game, and the number of medals paid out corresponding to that combination is equal to or greater than the remaining number up to the maximum payout number, that game can be identified as the final bonus game. In other words, while there is a risk of reliability being reduced when estimating the number of remaining games (two or three), the final game can be accurately identified. Therefore, if the continuous effects are configured to start in the final bonus game, the continuous effects can be executed with one game reliably added to the number of remaining games in the premonition mode. This not only increases the number of games in which continuous effects can be played, but also makes it possible to optimally synchronize the continuous effects with the premonition mode.

Sixth Embodiment
As already explained, the advantageous zone ends when either of the following conditions is met: the advantageous zone game count AG reaches the upper limit (1500 games) or the advantageous zone coin count MY reaches the upper limit (2400 coins). In this embodiment, an ending effect is performed in accordance with the timing of the advantageous zone ending based on the fulfillment of these conditions, and the execution of this ending effect is well thought out. This embodiment will be explained below with reference to Figures 85 to 89. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 85. This process is executed by the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process of Fig. 47. In Fig. 85, the same steps as those in the effect setting process of Fig. 47 are assigned the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1905 (if the newly received command is a start command), a start effect setting process is executed in step S1906. Next, in step S4301, an ending effect setting process is executed to set the ending effect, and in the following step S4302, an ending effect execution process is executed to execute the set ending effect. After execution of step S4302 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1905 (if the newly received command is not a start command), the process proceeds to step S1907, where it is determined whether the newly received command was a command at the time of each stop operation.

<Ending performance setting process>
The ending effect setting process in step S4301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the ending effect setting process, first in step S4401, it is determined whether either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. These ending flags allow the CPU 181 to know that an ending effect is being executed.

If it is determined that either the first ending flag or the second ending flag has been stored, it is assumed that the ending effect has already been set, and this ending effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag has been stored, the process proceeds to step S4402, where it is determined whether or not the game is currently in a favorable zone.

If it is determined that the game is in an advantageous zone, step S4403 determines whether the current number of remaining games will reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone (1,500 games) based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. In this step, for example, the total of the number of games in the advantageous zone (the number of games played in the advantageous zone), the number of remaining games in AT mode, the number of remaining games in CZ mode, and the number of remaining games in premonition mode is determined, and it is determined whether the determined result is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the advantageous zone. If the total is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the advantageous zone, it is determined that the advantageous zone will reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone with the current number of remaining games. Conversely, if the total is less than or equal to the upper limit of the advantageous zone, it is determined that the advantageous zone will not reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone with the current number of remaining games. For example, if the number of games played in the advantageous zone is 1,450 and there are 50 or more games remaining in the AT mode, and if the player continues playing in the AT mode, it is expected that the upper limit of the advantageous zone will be reached before the AT mode ends, it will be determined that the upper limit of the advantageous zone will be reached with the current number of games remaining.

When making the above determination, it is necessary for the display control device 81 to be able to grasp the number of games in the advantageous zone, the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. In this regard, various commands indicating information such as the number of games in the advantageous zone and the number of games remaining in AT mode can be sent from the main control device 101 at the start and end of each game, and the display control device 81 can analyze these commands to obtain information such as the number of games in the advantageous zone and the number of games remaining in AT mode.

The determination in step S4403 may also be made on the main control device 101 side, with the result notified to the display control device 81. For example, the main control device 101 may determine whether the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone will be reached within the range of the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc., and if it determines that the upper limit will be reached, a command indicating this may be output to the display control device 81.

If it is determined in step S4403 that the current number of remaining games will not cause the advantageous zone to reach its upper limit, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined whether the current number of remaining games will cause the advantageous zone to reach its upper limit increase (2,400 coins) based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc.

Specifically, the system first calculates the expected medal increase or decrease (future expected increase or decrease) when the remaining AT mode is played using the number of games remaining in the AT mode and the expected net increase or average increase per game during the AT mode. The system then adds the calculated expected increase or decrease to the actual increase or decrease in medals since the advantageous zone began (current actual increase or decrease), and determines whether the result (the sum of the current actual increase or decrease and the expected future increase or decrease) is greater than or equal to the upper limit increase of the advantageous zone. If the result is greater than or equal to the upper limit increase of the advantageous zone, the system determines that the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit increase with the current remaining number of games. Conversely, if the sum is less than or equal to the upper limit increase of the advantageous zone, the system determines that the advantageous zone will not reach its upper limit increase with the current remaining number of games. For example, if there are 30 games remaining in AT mode (the expected net increase per game in AT mode is approximately +8.04 coins, and the expected increase in the remaining number of games is approximately 240 coins), and the increase or decrease in the advantageous zone at that time is 2160 coins or more, and it is expected that the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone will be reached before the end of AT mode if the player continues playing in AT mode, it will be determined that the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone will be reached with the current number of games remaining.

If it is determined that the current number of remaining games will not reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone increase, the ending effect setting process is terminated, and the ending effect setting will not be performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous zone increase will be reached, or if a positive judgment is made in step S4403 above (if it is determined that the current number of remaining games will reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S4405, and it is determined whether the current game start timing is the timing to start the ending effect. This judgment is made, for example, by comparing the number of games for which the ending effect will be executed (e.g., 10 games) with the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, and if the two values match, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (start game).

In the above case, when the advantageous zone ends by reaching the upper limit of increase in the advantageous zone, the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone is calculated by dividing the number of coins remaining up to the upper limit of increase by the expected net increase or average increase per game in AT mode. In this case, the decimal point of the division result may be rounded down or rounded up. For example, if the number of coins remaining up to the upper limit of increase is 150, 18 or 19 games are considered to be the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone. Note that the determination process in step S4404 may be performed on the main control unit 101 side, as in step S4403, and the result may be notified to the display control unit 81.

If it is determined in step S4405 that the current game start timing is not the timing to start the ending performance, the ending performance setting process is terminated without setting the ending performance. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game start timing is the timing to start the ending performance, the ending performance is set in step S4406.

The ending effect corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number being reached, and is configured as a series of effects that are performed over multiple games (e.g., 10 games). In the ending effect, for example, an animated video effect featuring a specific character or the like is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The animation effect in this case is set to play, for example, a 5-minute animated video on repeat. In addition, in the final game of the ending effect, an end notification is displayed, displaying words such as "Congratulations" or "END," to indicate to the player the end of the ending effect and advantageous zone.

In the following step S4407, it is determined whether the trigger for the end of the advantageous period is reaching the upper limit of the number of games played. If the advantageous period ends when the upper limit of the number of games played is reached, in step S4408 a first ending flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. The first ending flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine whether a first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous period when the upper limit of the number of games played is reached should be initiated or whether such effect is currently being executed.

On the other hand, if the advantageous period does not end when the upper limit number of games is reached, that is, if the advantageous period ends when the upper limit increase number is reached, a second ending flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a in step S4409. The second ending flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous period when the upper limit increase number is reached should be initiated or that such effect is currently being executed. Note that the first ending effect and the second ending effect may be the same or different in content.

After step S4408 or step S4409 is executed, this ending effect setting process ends.

<Ending performance execution processing>
The ending effect execution process in step S4302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the ending performance execution process, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether a first ending flag or a second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If either of these flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S4502, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an ending performance is executed in the current game. In this step, the above control is executed based on the setting result of step S4406 in Figure 86 (a). In this case, if an ending performance is already being executed, control is exercised so that the ending performance continues in the current game, and if the situation is before execution, control is exercised so that the ending performance starts from the current game.

After step S4502 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4501 (neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag is stored), this ending performance execution process is terminated.

<Bonus performance setting process>
The bonus effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87. This process is executed by the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 57. In Fig. 87, the same steps as those in the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 57 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2702 (if the first BB start command or the second BB start command has been received as the current start command), the process proceeds to step S4601, where it is determined whether a first ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that a first ending flag is not stored, it is determined in step S4602 whether a second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

If it is determined that the second ending flag has been stored, that is, if the second ending flag has been stored while the first BB start command or second BB start command has been received as the current start command, this means that a first BB win or a second BB win has been achieved during the execution of the second ending presentation, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number, and the bonus game for the winning BB state will begin. In this case, proceed to step S4603, and execute processing to clear (erase) the second ending flag. This will cancel the second ending presentation currently being executed. In other words, if the second ending flag is cleared, a negative determination will be made in step S4501 of the ending presentation execution processing (Figure 86 (b)) executed thereafter, and the second ending presentation will not continue, resulting in the second ending presentation being canceled.

After step S4603 is executed, step S2703 is executed to determine the current bonus type, and the following step S2704 is executed to set the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type. In other words, the setting process to start the bonus effect is executed. Note that even if a negative judgment is made in step S4602 above (the second ending flag is not stored), that is, if a bonus game in the first BB state or second BB state is started when neither the first ending effect nor the second ending effect is being executed, steps S2703 and S2704 are executed, and the setting process to start the bonus effect is executed.

If the above step S4601 returns a positive result (the first ending flag is stored), that is, if the first ending flag is stored while the first BB start command or second BB start command is received as the current start command, this means that a first BB win or a second BB win occurs during the execution of the first ending presentation, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit number of games, and the bonus game for the winning BB state will begin. In this case, the processing of steps S2703 and S2704 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2705. In other words, if a first BB or second BB bonus game begins during the execution of the first ending presentation, the first ending presentation continues and the bonus presentation does not begin.

In step S2705, it is determined whether the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. If either of these BB states is being executed, in step S2706 it is determined whether a pseudo-omen end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that a pseudo-omen end flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4604, where it is determined whether a BB end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. The BB end flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the first ending performance has ended while the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed.

If it is determined that the BB end flag is not stored, the bonus effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the BB end flag is stored, the process clears (deletes) the BB end flag in step S4605, and then proceeds to step S2703. In other words, if the first ending effect continues after the transition to the bonus game, the bonus effect is controlled to start after the ending effect has ended.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 88. This process is executed by the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 56.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2619 (if the first BB end command or second BB end command has not been received as the current full stop command), the process proceeds to step S4701, where it is determined whether or not a first ending flag is stored in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. If the first ending flag is stored, that is, if the first ending presentation corresponding to the end of the advantageous period due to reaching the upper limit number of games is being executed, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not the current game is the game in which the first ending presentation should be ended. In this step, the above judgment is made by referring to whether or not the current game is the end game of the advantageous period (in other words, whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous period is 0), and if the current game is the end game of the advantageous period, the current game is recognized as the game in which the first ending presentation should be ended.

If it is determined that the current game is one in which the ending presentation should be completed, processing is executed in step S4703 to clear (erase) the first ending flag. This ends the ending presentation. In other words, if the first ending flag is cleared at the end of a game in which the first ending presentation should be completed, a negative judgment is made in step S4501 of the ending presentation execution processing (Figure 86 (b)) executed at the start of the next game. In this case, the first ending presentation will no longer be executed in that game, and as a result, the first ending presentation will end.

After step S4703 is executed, step S4704 determines whether the first BB state or the second BB state is in progress. If it is determined that the first BB state or the second BB state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S4705, where the BB end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. After step S4705 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4704 (neither the first BB state nor the second BB state is in progress), the process proceeds to step S2621, where other all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4702 above (if it is determined that the current game is not one in which the first ending presentation should be ended), the first ending presentation currently being executed will be continued, and processing will proceed to step S2621 without executing the processes of steps S4703 to S4705.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4701 (the first ending flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S4706, where it is determined whether or not a second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If the second ending flag is stored, that is, if the second ending presentation corresponding to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number is being executed, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not the current game is a game in which the second ending presentation should be ended. Note that the specific processing for this judgment is the same as in step S4702.

If it is determined that the current game is one in which the second ending presentation should end, processing is executed in step S4708 to clear (erase) the second ending flag. This ends the second ending presentation. After execution of step S4708 or if a negative judgment is made in step S4707 (if it is determined that the current game is not one in which the second ending presentation should end), processing proceeds to step S2621, and processing is executed to set other presentations when all games are stopped.

<Ending production flow>
Next, the flow of the ending effect will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Here, the case where the second BB win is achieved during the ending effect (when the state shifts to the second BB state) will be described as an example.

First, with reference to Figure 89(a), we will explain what happens when a second BB win occurs during the first ending presentation, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit number of games.

At timing t1 during the advantageous zone, when the timing for the first ending effect to start arrives, the first ending effect begins. Then, in a game during which the first ending effect is being played, if the player bets two and achieves a second BB win in that game, a bonus game in the second BB state will begin from the next game (timing t2).

In this embodiment, if a transition to a bonus game occurs in the middle of a favorable zone, the favorable zone does not end, and the number of games played in the favorable zone (advantageous zone game count AG) is counted during the favorable zone, regardless of whether a bonus game is in progress or not (see Figure 45). Therefore, even if a transition to the second BB state occurs while the first ending presentation is being executed, the number of games remaining in the favorable zone does not change, and remains the same as when the transition to the second BB state does not occur. Taking this into consideration, this embodiment is configured to continue the first ending presentation that is currently being executed even when a bonus game is started (timing t2).

Then, when the number of games played during the advantageous period reaches the upper limit and the advantageous period ends (timing t3), the first ending effect will end. At that time, in the final game of the first ending effect, an ending announcement will be made, displaying text such as "Congratulations."

In this embodiment, the first ending effect ends exactly at the end of the advantageous zone; however, in a configuration where the ending effect is executed by repeatedly playing a video of a predetermined length of time, for example, ending the ending effect at the end of the advantageous zone may create a poor separation in the presentation, depending on the pace of the player's play. For this reason, the end of the first ending effect may be slightly earlier or later (for example, by 2 or 3 games) than the end of the advantageous zone.

Then, after the first ending effect ends, a bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is executed. In other words, if the state transitions to the second BB state while the first ending effect is being executed, the start of the bonus effect is delayed in favor of the first ending effect, and the bonus effect is started after the first ending effect has ended. After that, when the bonus game ends at timing t4, the bonus effect that started at timing t3 ends.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 89 (b) what happens when a second BB win occurs during the second ending performance, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number.

At timing t11 during the advantageous period, when the timing for the second ending effect to start arrives, the second ending effect will begin. Thereafter, in a game during which the second ending effect is being executed, if the player bets two and achieves a second BB win in that game, a bonus game in the second BB state will begin from the next game (timing t12).

As already explained, the net increase in coins per game in AT mode is approximately +8.04 coins, while the net increase in coins per game in the second BB state is approximately -0.96 coins. In other words, by transitioning to the second BB state, the number of medals changes from a state of large increases to a state of gradual decreases. On the other hand, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone (the number of games played until the upper limit of increase is reached) referenced when determining the start timing (start game) of the second ending presentation is understood (estimated) based on the rate of increase in medals before transitioning to the second BB state.

As a result, the transition to the second BB state changes the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, causing the end timing of the advantageous zone to differ from the timing estimated at the start of the second ending presentation (more specifically, the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone increases, and the end timing of the advantageous zone is delayed). In this case, in this embodiment, the second ending presentation is not continued and the second ending presentation that is currently being performed is forcibly terminated. In other words, the second ending presentation is terminated in an unfinished state without an end notification being executed (timing t12).

In addition, at timing t2 when the bonus game starts, a bonus effect corresponding to the second BB begins. In other words, if the state transitions to the second BB state while the second ending effect is being executed, the second ending effect is stopped and the bonus effect begins. Then, when the bonus game ends at timing t13, the bonus effect that began at timing t12 ends. Note that the second ending effect does not resume even when the bonus game ends.

After the bonus game ends, the game switches to AT mode, where medals begin to increase again. At timing t14, when the number of medals increased during the advantageous period (advantageous period increase/decrease number MY) reaches the upper limit, the advantageous period ends. At this time, the second ending performance has already been canceled, so no end notification is issued.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the second BB state is entered during the execution of the second ending performance, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number, the second ending performance currently being executed will be stopped.

Because the AT mode during a favorable zone is a game state in which medals are likely to increase, the end of the favorable zone due to reaching the upper limit of increase is likely to occur during AT mode. Therefore, the second ending effect, which occurs in response to the end of the favorable zone due to reaching the upper limit of increase, is also likely to occur during AT mode. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the net increase in medals per game is a negative value, resulting in a decrease in medals. Therefore, if the game transitions to the second BB state during a second ending effect performed during AT mode, the medal increase rate turns negative, and the number of games remaining until the upper limit of increase is reached increases significantly. As a result, the end game of the favorable zone is significantly delayed, which can lead to the inconvenience of the favorable zone not ending even though the second ending effect has been completed to the end. In this regard, with this configuration, if the game transitions to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect, the second ending effect currently being executed is stopped, preventing the ending effect from being completed to the end. This effectively reduces player confusion caused by a mismatch between the ending effect and the favorable zone.

If the second BB state is entered during the execution of the first ending effect, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit number of games, the first ending effect will continue.

For example, if a configuration in which a transition to the second BB state occurs while an ending effect is being executed always halts the ending effect, there is a risk that the ending effect will be interrupted frequently. In this regard, with this configuration, if a transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the first ending effect, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit of the number of games, the ending effect will continue. If the advantageous zone ends when the number of executed games in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone game count AG) reaches the upper limit of the number of games, the end game of the advantageous zone will not change even if a transition to the second BB state occurs during that time. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the ending effect with the advantageous zone, while reducing the frequency with which the ending effect is interrupted.

Seventh Embodiment
In this embodiment, when the second BB state is entered during execution of the second ending effect, the second ending effect is not uniformly stopped, but is instead configured to be stopped or continued in some cases. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 93. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the above embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase in the advantageous zone is reached and the number of games remaining until the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is reached, with reference to Figure 90.

For example, suppose the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone is reached is less than the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone is reached. In this case, as shown in Figure 90(a), the timing for reaching the upper limit of the increase in the number of games (timing t1) arrives before the timing for reaching the upper limit of the increase in the number of games (timing t2), and the upper limit of the increase in the number of games is reached before the upper limit of the increase in the number of games.

In this situation, as shown in Figure 90 (b), if the game transitions to the second BB state at timing t11 before the upper limit increase is reached, the number of medals does not increase during the second BB state, and therefore the number of medals increased during the advantageous zone (advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY) does not increase. As a result, the number of games played (number of remaining games) required to reach the upper limit increase increases, resulting in a delay in reaching the upper limit increase (more specifically, the timing of reaching the upper limit increase is delayed by at least the number of bonus games). On the other hand, since the number of games played in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone game number AG) is counted regardless of whether a bonus game is in progress or not, depending on the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase at the start of the bonus game, the upper limit game number may be reached earlier than the upper limit increase (timing t12).

In this embodiment, taking into consideration the possibility of the above-mentioned reversal phenomenon, if the game transitions to the second BB state while the second ending performance is being performed, a switch is made to determine whether to continue or cancel the ending performance. The configuration for this is explained in detail below.

<Bonus performance setting process>
The bonus effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 91. This process is executed by the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 87. In Fig. 91, the same steps as those in the bonus effect setting process of Fig. 87 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4601 (the first ending flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S4602, where it is determined whether a second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, that is, if the second ending flag is stored when the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the current start command, this means that a first BB win or a second BB win is achieved during the execution of the second ending presentation corresponding to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number, and the bonus game for the winning side of each BB state will begin. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5101, where the number of games remaining until the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone is determined.

In the following step S5102, it is determined whether the number of games remaining up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone determined in step S5101 above is less than a predetermined number of games. In this case, the predetermined number of games is a number of games equal to or less than the number of games played in the first BB state or the second BB state. Note that in this embodiment, since only the second BB state can transition to the advantageous zone out of the first BB state or the second BB state, the predetermined number of games is a number of games equal to or less than the number of games played in the second BB state.

As already explained, the second BB state in this embodiment is configured to end when the number of medals paid out during the BB state reaches the upper payout limit (46), so the number of games from the start to the end of the bonus game is not uniquely determined. Therefore, the number of games to be played in the second BB state is determined by using the expected number of games to be played, which is either a design expectation or a performance average. For example, if the expected number of games to be played is 30, this embodiment uses 30 as the predetermined number of games. In other words, in this embodiment, step S5102 determines whether the upper limit of the advantageous zone has been reached during the bonus game.

Incidentally, since the second BB state is a bonus game in which medals are reduced, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in the middle of a favorable zone, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number will increase by at least the number of games played in the second BB state. In other words, the determination in step S5102 above (determining whether the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games is equal to or less than the number of games played in the second BB state) essentially also determines whether a reversal phenomenon will occur.

If step S5102 determines that the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous zone is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (if the upper limit of the advantageous zone is not reached during the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S5103, where a process is executed to clear (erase) the second ending flag. This stops the second ending presentation currently being executed. After step S5103 is executed, a process is executed in step S2703 to determine the current bonus type, and then in the following step S2704, a bonus presentation corresponding to the bonus type is set. In other words, a setting process is executed to start the bonus presentation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 above that the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous zone is reached is less than the predetermined number of games (if the upper limit of the advantageous zone is reached during the execution of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S5104, where a continuation flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. After that, the bonus effect setting process ends without executing the processing of steps S2703 and S2704. In other words, the second ending effect currently being executed continues, and the bonus effect does not start. The continuation flag in step S5104 is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the second ending effect has continued.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2706 (the pseudo-omen end flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S5105, where it is determined whether or not a BB end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. The BB end flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that the first ending effect or the second ending effect has ended while the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed.

If it is determined that the BB end flag is stored, processing is executed in step S5106 to clear (erase) the BB end flag, and then processing proceeds to step S2703. In other words, if the first ending effect or second ending effect continues after the transition to the bonus game, control is performed so that the bonus effect starts after the ending effect has ended.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 92. This process is executed by the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 88. In Fig. 92, the same steps as those in the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 88 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4701 (the first ending flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S5201, where it is determined whether or not a second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If it is determined that the second ending flag is not stored, the full stop effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second ending flag has been stored, this means that either the second ending presentation, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous period due to the upper limit increase being reached, is currently being executed, or the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase has been determined to be less than the predetermined number of games in step S5102 of the bonus presentation setting process (FIG. 91), and the second ending presentation has continued even after the transition to the bonus game. In this case, proceed to step S5202, where it is determined whether or not a continuation flag has been stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that the continuation flag has not been stored, i.e., the advantageous period has ended due to the upper limit increase being reached, the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase is reached is determined in step S5202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuation flag has been stored, i.e., the second ending presentation has continued even after the transition to the bonus game, the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase is reached is determined in step S5204.

After step S5203 or step S5204 is executed, proceed to step S5205, where the number of remaining games determined in each of the above steps is referenced to determine whether the current game is the game in which the ongoing or ongoing second ending presentation should end. In other words, in the case of a second ending presentation that is being executed in response to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number, the current game is determined to be the end game of that ending presentation if it is the game in which the upper limit increase number of the advantageous zone is reached, and in the case of a second ending presentation that is continued after transitioning to a bonus game, the current game is determined to be the end game of that ending presentation if it is the game in which the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is reached.

If it is determined that the current game is not a game that should end the second ending presentation, the all stop presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game is a game that should end the second ending presentation, the second ending flag is cleared (erased) in step S5206. This ends the second ending presentation that is currently being executed or is ongoing.

In the following step S5207, it is determined whether a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that a continuation flag is stored, processing is executed in step S5208 to clear (erase) the continuation flag. In the following step S5209, a BB end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a, and then this all-stop effect setting processing is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in the above step S5207 (if the continuation flag is not stored), this all-stop effect setting processing is terminated without executing the processing in steps S5208 and S5209.

<Ending production flow>
Next, the flow of the ending presentation will be explained with reference to Figure 93. Here, we will explain the example of the case where the second BB winning is achieved (the transition to the second BB state) during the second ending presentation (the ending presentation corresponding to the end of the advantageous period due to reaching the upper limit increase number). Note that the flow when the second BB winning is achieved during the first ending presentation (the ending presentation corresponding to the end of the advantageous period due to reaching the upper limit game number) is the same as in the case of the sixth embodiment.

At timing t1 during the advantageous zone, when the timing for the second ending effect to start arrives, the second ending effect will begin. Then, in a game during which the second ending effect is being executed, if the player bets two and achieves a second BB win in that game, a bonus game in the second BB state will begin from the next game (timing t2).

At this time, the number of games X remaining in the advantageous zone up to the upper limit is determined, and a determination is made as to whether the number of remaining games X is less than a predetermined number of games (30 games). For example, if the number of remaining games X is less than the predetermined number of games, the currently running ending presentation continues. In other words, if the upper limit of games is reached during the bonus game and the advantageous zone ends, in other words, if the transition to the bonus game increases the number of games remaining up to the upper limit increase, resulting in a difference between the timing at which the second ending presentation ends and the timing at which the upper limit increase is reached, but if this difference can be absorbed by the number of games remaining up to the upper limit in the bonus game, the currently running ending presentation will not be stopped.

In this case, the continuing ending effect will be a continuation of the second ending effect that was performed when the second BB win was achieved. For example, if the second ending effect is configured to play a five-minute animated video on repeat, the playback will continue as is.

After that, when the number of games played during the advantageous period reaches the upper limit and the advantageous period ends (timing t3), the second ending effect continues and ends. At that time, in the final game of the second ending effect, an ending notification is displayed displaying text such as "Congratulations." Then, after the second ending effect ends, a bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of remaining games X is greater than the predetermined number of games, the second ending presentation is not continued and is forcibly terminated. In other words, if the upper limit number of games is not reached during the bonus game and the advantageous zone does not end, the difference between the timing of the end of the second ending presentation and the timing of reaching the upper limit increase number cannot be absorbed within the bonus game, so as in the sixth embodiment, the second ending presentation being executed is stopped. In this case, the bonus presentation is executed in time with the start of the bonus game corresponding to the second BB state.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the game transitions to the second BB state while the second ending effect is being performed, which corresponds to the end of the advantageous zone due to reaching the upper limit increase number, the game is configured to determine whether or not to cancel the ending effect by referring to the number of games remaining up to the upper limit game number.

As described in the sixth embodiment above, if the end game of the advantageous zone is significantly delayed during the ending presentation, it is preferable to cancel the ending presentation to prevent player confusion caused by the ending presentation and the advantageous zone being out of sync. However, in order to allow the player to see the ending presentation to the end and elicit excitement and joy, there is also a desire to minimize opportunities to cancel the presentation. In this regard, in this configuration, when the second BB state is entered during the execution of the second ending presentation, the ending presentation is not uniformly canceled. Instead, the number of games remaining until the upper limit number of games is referenced. If the number of games remaining until the upper limit increase number increases, and the upper limit number of games is reached first (a reversal phenomenon occurs), the second ending presentation being executed is not canceled. This ensures that the second ending presentation will continue even if the player achieves a second BB win during the execution of the second ending presentation, making it possible to reduce the frequency with which the presentation is canceled.

If the second ending effect is continued, it is configured to end when the maximum number of games is reached. With this configuration, if the ending effect is continued due to a reversal phenomenon, the ending condition for the ending effect is changed to one that corresponds to the maximum number of games. Therefore, the continued second ending effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the advantageous zone, making it possible to optimally synchronize the ending effect with the advantageous zone.

If the game transitions to the second BB state while the second ending effect is being executed, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit is determined, and the second ending effect will continue only if that number of remaining games is equal to or less than the number of games executed in the second BB state. In other words, rather than extending the scope of continuation to include cases where a reversal occurs after the end of the second BB state, the second ending effect is continued only if the advantageous zone ends within the second BB state. This makes it possible to expand the opportunities for the ending effect to continue while preventing the execution period of the ending effect from being excessively extended.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the above-described embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each of the configurations to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the premonition mode is extended by one game when a two-bet game is played. However, the premonition mode may be extended when a condition other than the two-bet game is met. Furthermore, the premonition mode may be extended by multiple games when a condition for extending the premonition mode is met.

(2) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, after the premonition mode ends, the AT mode is transitioned to by winning the AT mode transition trigger role. However, the AT mode may be transitioned to by the end of the premonition mode without providing the transition trigger role.

(3) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the premonition counter is not updated when a two-bet game is played during the premonition mode. However, it is acceptable to have a configuration in which the premonition counter is not updated at least when a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous effect, such as updating the premonition counter even if a two-bet game is played during the premonition mode before the start of a continuous effect.

(4) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the continuous performance for the real premonition is always executed when a player wins CZ mode, etc. However, the continuous performance for the real premonition may also be executed when a player wins CZ mode, etc. and also wins the lottery for executing the continuous performance. Furthermore, the continuous performance for the pseudo premonition is not limited to the configurations of the first to fifth embodiments described above. For example, in a configuration in which an AT lottery is executed only for certain specific roles, the AT lottery is executed when a specific role is triggered, and if the lottery is unsuccessful, the continuous performance for the pseudo premonition is always executed.

(5) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the continuous effects are configured to progress in units of one game, but the effects may also be configured to progress in units of multiple games.

(6) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, a winning notification is made in the final game of a continuous performance. However, a winning notification may also be made in an intermediate game of a continuous performance. In this case, a transition to CZ mode, etc. may be made after the continuous performance ends, or a transition to CZ mode, etc. may be made before the continuous performance ends (the continuous performance continues even after CZ mode, etc. is started).

(7) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the number of remaining games in the premonition mode is updated at the start of the game, but it may also be updated at a time other than the start of the game, such as at the end of the game.

(8) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when the main control unit 101 updates the number of remaining games in the premonition mode, it outputs a premonition game count update command to the display control unit 81, and the display control unit 81 determines that the number of premonition games has not been updated based on the fact that the command is not output. However, when the main control unit 101 does not update the number of remaining games in the premonition mode, it may output a command indicating that the number of remaining games will not be updated (premonition game count non-update command), thereby notifying the display control unit 81 that the number of premonition games will not be updated. The same applies to CZ mode; when the main control unit 101 does not update the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, it may output a command indicating that the number of remaining games will not be updated (CZ game count non-update command).

(9) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, a command indicating the number of games remaining may be sent to the display control device 81 during the premonition mode. With this configuration, even if a discrepancy occurs in the number of games remaining recognized by the display control device 81 due to some factor, the discrepancy can be corrected appropriately. Therefore, in a configuration in which the premonition mode may not be updated, the recognition of the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 regarding the number of games remaining in the premonition mode can be more appropriately matched. Note that the command indicating the number of games remaining may be output together with the premonition game number update command or the premonition game number non-update command (information about the number of games remaining may be included in the premonition game number update command or the premonition game number non-update command), or it may be output separately from these commands.

(10) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, if the consecutive presentation for this premonition is stopped by transitioning to the second BB state, a new consecutive presentation for this premonition is executed after the second BB state. However, the configuration may also be such that the stopped consecutive presentation is continued after the second BB state based on the number of games remaining in the premonition mode. With this configuration, a winning notification can be made during the consecutive presentation when it is resumed. Furthermore, because the consecutive presentation is prevented from ending halfway through, it is possible to show the consecutive presentation to the end, for example, in cases where the consecutive presentation is not executed frequently and is of high value to the player, such as a premium presentation, etc.

When resuming a subsequent consecutive performance, for example, when a transition to the second BB state occurs or a second BB win is achieved, information indicating the type of consecutive performance that was stopped and information indicating the progress of that consecutive performance (for example, the value of the consecutive performance counter) can be retained (stored), and the subsequent consecutive performance can be executed based on this information after the second BB state ends. In this case, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the second BB state ends can be determined, but since the number of games remaining in the consecutive performance (the number of games for which the subsequent consecutive performance will be executed) directly corresponds to the number of games remaining in the premonition mode, it is not necessarily necessary to re-determine the number of games remaining in the premonition mode.

(11) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, whether or not to execute a continuous effect after the end of the second BB state may be configured to be switched depending on the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the end of the second BB state. For example, if the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the minimum number of games for which a continuous effect can be executed (three games for the first to fourth embodiments, two games for the fifth embodiment), the continuous effect after the second BB state may be executed, and if the number of remaining games is less than the minimum number, the continuous effect after the second BB state may not be executed.

The decision as to whether or not to execute a continuous effect after the end of the second BB state is not limited to being based on the number of games remaining in the premonition mode after the end of the second BB state, but may be made selectable by the player using, for example, the effect switch 66.

(12) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when a continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, a notification indicating that the execution of the continuous effect is pending or on hold (for example, a notification displaying text such as "Waiting for continuous effect") may be provided during the second BB state or for a predetermined number of games before the end of the second BB state. With this configuration, even if the continuous effect is stopped without a win or loss being determined due to the transition to the second BB state, and a bonus effect is executed, the player can be aware that the continuous effect will be executed again later. This can eliminate player anxiety that, for example, a win in the CZ mode or the like has been canceled by achieving a second BB win, allowing the player to proceed with the second BB bonus game with peace of mind.

(13) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when a continuous performance is executed after the second BB state ends, it may be possible to configure the system to switch between executing a new continuous performance or executing a continuing continuous performance. For example, the system may be configured to perform the above switching based on the type of continuous performance being executed when the system transitions to the second BB state. In this case, if the continuous performance being executed when the system transitions to the second BB state is a continuous performance that is executed relatively frequently, the new continuous performance is executed after the second BB state ends. However, if the continuous performance being executed when the system transitions to the second BB state is an infrequent performance, such as a premium performance, the continuing continuous performance is executed after the second BB state ends. This configuration prevents rare continuous performances from being limited to the middle due to the transition to the second BB state, while for regular continuous performances that are not expected to generate that much interest, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the continuous performance being executed before the suspension and the continuous performance after the second BB state, thereby preventing player confusion caused by mixing the two.

Note that the method of switching between executing a new consecutive performance or executing a subsequent consecutive performance is not limited to the above, and may be selectable by the player using, for example, a performance switch 66.

(14) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when a specific effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, the type of continuous effect is selected randomly. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different type of continuous effect is executed than the continuous effect that was executed when the second BB state was entered. This configuration makes it possible to more clearly distinguish between the continuous effect that was executed before the cancellation and the continuous effect that follows the second BB state.

(15) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, a transition to the premonition mode is configured to wait for both a winning notification and a transition to a special state (such as CZ mode), but a configuration in which only one of these is waited for may also be used. For example, even if only a winning notification is waited for, an extension of the premonition mode triggered by a two-bet game will cause a discrepancy between the timing of the winning notification recognized by the main control device 101 and the timing of the winning notification recognized by the display control device 81, and it is expected that each of the above embodiments will function effectively as a countermeasure to such an event.

(16) In the first and second embodiments described above, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous effect in the premonition mode, a preliminary effect is executed. However, a continuous effect may be executed during the CZ mode, and if a two-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect, a preliminary effect may be executed. In a configuration in which a win notification is made at the end of the CZ mode or the system transitions to the AT mode after the end of the CZ mode, the CZ mode functions as a standby period just like the premonition mode. Therefore, if a two-bet game is played during the CZ mode and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is not updated, the continuous effect and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode will not be synchronized. It is expected that each of the above embodiments will function effectively as a countermeasure to such an event. The continuous effect in the CZ mode may be the same as the continuous effect in the premonition mode, or may be exclusive to the CZ mode.

(17) In the first and second embodiments described above, the auxiliary effects are executed using the same execution means as the execution means for executing the continuous effects (auxiliary display unit 65), but the auxiliary effects may also be executed using a different execution means.

(18) In the first and second embodiments described above, if a two-bet game is played while a continuous performance is being executed, a preliminary performance is inserted in the middle of the continuous performance. However, the preliminary performance may be executed in place of the performance currently being executed. For example, in a situation where the main premonition scenario H-2 is scheduled to be executed in the second game after the start of the continuous performance, the main premonition preliminary scenario H-2 may be executed when a two-bet game is played, and then, if a three-bet game is played in the third game, the next main premonition scenario H-3 may be executed in place of the main premonition scenario H-2.

(19) In the first and second embodiments described above, the effect data (image data) for one game of preliminary effects may be smaller in size than the effect data (image data) for one game of continuous effects. In this case, the data for preliminary effects can be kept small, thereby saving on the storage capacity of the storage means that stores the effect data. Preliminary effects are preliminary effects that are used in case the premonition mode is extended and are not generally executed. By keeping the data for such effects small, it is possible to prevent the storage area for the original data for continuous effects and data for other effects from being compressed. Furthermore, by reducing the data capacity of the preliminary effects, they can be read out in a short time, which is preferable given the nature of preliminary effects that are suddenly executed when the premonition mode is extended during the execution of continuous effects.

(20) In the first and second embodiments described above, the setting process for the preliminary effects is performed in the same game as the setting process for the continuous effects, and in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effects are executed. However, the setting process for the preliminary effects may also be performed in the game in which the preliminary effects are to be executed (in other words, the game in which the two-bet game is executed).

In addition, in the first and second embodiments described above, the preliminary effect setting process is performed in advance, but if the preliminary effect data (image data) is stored in compressed data format, the decompression process (expansion) may be performed in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to decompress all of the preliminary effect data in advance; for example, some of the effect data may be decompressed in advance, such as decompressing the preliminary effect data for the third game from the start of consecutive effects into a game before the third game (for example, the second game).

(21) In the first and second embodiments described above, if a two-bet game is played while a series of pseudo-premonition effects is being executed, the preliminary effects are not executed. However, the preliminary effects may be executed. In this case, the presence or absence of the preliminary effects prevents the winning status from being revealed in advance, and it becomes possible to maintain the player's anticipation for the outcome of the series of effects for a long time.

(22) In the first and second embodiments described above, the configurations of both embodiments may be combined. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a preliminary effect is executed in a game in which a two-bet game is played and in which a preliminary effect is executed in a game subsequent to the game in which the two-bet game is played. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, depending on the progress of a consecutive effect (such as the number of games since the start of the consecutive effects), the preliminary effect is switched between being executed in a game in which a two-bet game is played and being executed in a game subsequent to the game in which the two-bet game is played. This makes it possible to implement a configuration in which a preliminary effect is executed immediately if the timing is a good break in the flow of consecutive effects, and prioritizes the consecutive effects and postpones the preliminary effect if the timing is not good. Furthermore, the above switching may be performed depending on the type of consecutive effect. For example, in the case of a first consecutive effect, the preliminary effect is executed in a game in which a two-bet game is played, and in the case of a second consecutive effect, the preliminary effect is executed in a game subsequent to the game in which the two-bet game is played.

Note that the switching between executing the preliminary effect in the game in which the two-bet game was played and executing the preliminary effect in a game after the game in which the two-bet game was played is not limited to the above, and may be made possible for the player to select using, for example, the effect switch 66, etc.

(23) In the first and second embodiments described above, a continuous effect may not be executed after the second BB state ends. In this case, a confirmation effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 66(a)) may be executed after the second BB state ends to notify the player of a win, and the system may enter a standby state for transition to an AT mode, etc.

(24) In the first and second embodiments described above, when the second BB state is entered during the execution of the continuous performance for this precursor, it may be possible to switch between stopping or continuing the ongoing continuous performance. For example, it may be possible to switch between stopping or continuing the continuous performance depending on the type of continuous performance currently being executed, or to allow the player to select using the performance switch 66, etc.

(25) In the first embodiment described above, different types of preliminary effects are executed depending on the type and progress of the continuous performance. However, a common preliminary effect may also be executed regardless of the type and progress of the continuous performance.

(26) In the first embodiment described above, a dedicated effect is provided as a preliminary effect, but at least a portion of the effect video for the continuous effect (for example, a cut-in video displayed when the effect switch 66 is operated) may be reused as at least a part of the preliminary effect. In this case, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect that is highly related to the continuous effect while suppressing the increase in data volume associated with the preliminary effect.

(27) In the first embodiment described above, the scenario data table for the preliminary effects is stored in the same storage means (RAM 183) as the scenario data table for the continuous effects, but it may also be configured to be stored in a storage means separate from the scenario data table for the continuous effects.

(28) In the first embodiment described above, a preliminary effect is executed each time a two-bet game is played. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a preliminary effect is executed when the number of two-bet games played (number of extended games in the premonition mode) reaches a predetermined number (for example, two times or two games), and a preliminary effect is not executed if the number is less than the predetermined number. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a preliminary effect is executed once each time the number of two-bet games reaches a predetermined number. With these configurations, although there may be a slight difference between the continuous effect and the ending game of the premonition mode, if the difference is within an acceptable range, the progression of the continuous effect takes priority, and interruptions in the continuous effect due to the preliminary effect can be minimized.

(29) In the first embodiment described above, the scenario data table was configured to set information about the actual premonition preliminary scenario in association with the value of the consecutive counter. However, it may also be configured to set information about the progress of the consecutive performances (for example, information about the first performance, second performance, etc. in the consecutive performances) or each performance during the consecutive performances (for example, actual premonition preliminary scenario H-2 in association with actual premonition scenario H-2).

(30) In the second embodiment described above, the preliminary effect is configured to repeat the premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect consisting of one game for the number of extended games in the premonition mode. However, it is also possible to prepare multiple preliminary effects of different lengths (number of games), and select and execute one of these preliminary effects with a length corresponding to the number of extended games in the premonition mode.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, only one type of preliminary effect, the main premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect, was provided as a preliminary effect. However, it is also possible to prepare multiple types of preliminary effects, such as the enemy character 212 launching an attack or the warrior character 211 and enemy character 212 facing off in a matched position, in addition to the main premonition preliminary scenario H-Battle effect, and to combine and execute these preliminary effects in accordance with the number of extended games in the premonition mode.

(32) In the second embodiment described above, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous effect, the presentation mode of the continuous effect may be changed to execute a revival effect. For example, if the continuous effect is set to four games and a two-bet game is played during the continuous effect, a loss notification effect (loss effect, failed transformation effect) is executed in the fourth game from the start of the continuous effect, and a win notification effect (success effect, successful transformation effect) is executed in the next game. This configuration makes it possible to increase the number of games in which the continuous effect is executed without causing any inconsistencies with the results of the win/loss lottery, and to accommodate delays in transition to CZ mode, etc.

It is also possible to configure the system to switch between changing the presentation mode of the ongoing consecutive presentation to a revival presentation or inserting a preliminary presentation depending on the number of two-bet games. For example, if there is one two-bet game from the start of the consecutive presentation to the specified game (if the premonition mode is extended by one game), the presentation mode can be changed to a revival presentation, and if there are two or more two-bet games (if the premonition mode is extended by two or more games), a preliminary presentation can be inserted as described in the second embodiment above.

(33) In the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not a preliminary effect is performed is switched depending on the number of two-bet games (number of extended games in the premonition mode) counted by the preliminary effect counter. Specifically, a preliminary effect may not be performed if the number of extended games in the premonition mode is a predetermined number (e.g., one game) or less, and a preliminary effect may be performed if the number of extended games is greater than the predetermined number. In other words, if the extension of the premonition mode is within an acceptable range, a configuration may be adopted in which a preliminary effect is not performed in favor of continuing the continuous effects.

(34) In the third and fourth embodiments described above, if a two-bet game is played during the execution of the main precursor continuous effect, the preliminary effect is not executed. However, the preliminary effect may be executed as in the first and second embodiments described above.

(35) In the third embodiment described above, the AT winning notification effect (confirmation effect) shown in FIG. 66(a) is executed as a standby effect after the consecutive effects. However, it is also possible to execute an effect other than a confirmation effect, such as a notification or effect that allows the player to recognize that they are waiting for the end of the premonition mode.

(36) In the third embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a player is notified of the number of waiting games (the number of games remaining in the premonition mode) at least after the consecutive performance. In this case, for example, a countdown display may be displayed, and the number of remaining games indicated by the notification may decrease each time the number of remaining games is updated. The notification may be made during the consecutive performance, or after the consecutive performance has ended. However, with the former configuration, it would become clear that this is a premonition (i.e., that a win has been reached) before the consecutive performance has ended, so the latter configuration is preferable in order to maintain the player's sense of anticipation until the end of the consecutive performance.

(37) In the fourth embodiment described above, if the second BB state is entered while a series of performances for a real premonition is being executed, the subsequent series of performances is changed to a series of performances for a pseudo premonition. However, it is not necessary to change all of the series of performances from the second BB state onwards to a series of performances for a pseudo premonition. It is also possible to continue the series of performances for a real premonition and change only the last one (the end of the series of performances) to a miss notification, or to change part of the final stage (the part of the final game of the series of performances) to a pseudo premonition.

(38) In the fourth embodiment described above, when the second BB state is entered during the execution of the continuous performance for the main precursor, it may be possible to switch between changing to the continuous performance for a pseudo precursor, or canceling or suspending the continuous performance currently being executed.

For example, the number of games remaining in the continuous effect when the transition to the second BB state is made may be determined, and the effect mode may be changed or not depending on the determined number of remaining games. Specifically, if the determined number of remaining games is greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 1 game), the continuous effect may be changed to a pseudo-premonition continuous effect (miss notification), and if the determined number of remaining games is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the continuous effect may be stopped and a bonus effect may be executed.

Once a continuous performance has progressed to a certain extent, a player may have more or less determined that they have won. If a player like this switches to a loss notification when they are almost certain that they have won, there is a concern that this could provoke resentment among the player and reduce their interest in the continuous performance. In this regard, the above configuration effectively prevents a loss notification from being issued when the player is almost certain that they have won.

The above switching may also be configured to occur depending on the type of consecutive performance currently being performed. For example, in the case of the first consecutive performance, the change may be made to a consecutive performance for a pseudo-premonition (miss notification), and in the case of the second consecutive performance, the currently running consecutive performance may be stopped or interrupted. For example, this configuration may be used for the first consecutive performance, where it is impossible or difficult to determine whether or not a win has been made until the end, whereas the second consecutive performance may be configured in this way when a win is confirmed or is highly likely to be made at the time of execution.

(39) In the fourth embodiment described above, when the presentation mode of the continuous presentation is changed to one for pseudo-premonition, the scenario data table is rewritten when the first game in the second BB state starts, but it may also be rewritten at the end of the game in which the second BB win is achieved.

(40) In the fourth embodiment described above, when executing the consecutive performance for the main premonition, a specific notification (a notification that allows the player to recognize or infer that a specific trigger has been established or that the consecutive performance is being executed) may be executed separately from the consecutive performance in response to the establishment of a specific trigger (a trigger for the execution of the consecutive performance) or during the execution of the consecutive performance. In this case, it is preferable that the specific notification continues even after the presentation mode of the consecutive performance for the main premonition is changed to that for the pseudo premonition upon transition to the second BB state. With this configuration, even if the presentation mode is changed to that for the pseudo premonition upon transition to the second BB state, the player can determine that they are actually in a winning state by seeing the specific notification. In this case, in order to make the specific notification known only to those in the know and to arouse a sense of superiority in the player who understands that they have won based on the specific notification, it is preferable to make the specific notification using a notification means (for example, the upper lamp 63 or a dedicated lamp unit) separate from the presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces the continuous presentation, or to make the specific notification less noticeable than the continuous presentation (for example, by making the display size smaller than that of the continuous presentation).

Furthermore, when a specific notification is made via display, it is preferable to display the specific notification in the same position as it was immediately before the change after the presentation mode of the consecutive presentation has been changed to a pseudo-premonition, in order to prevent the player from losing track of the notification and becoming confused. In this case, for example, when the specific notification is made on a display screen such as the auxiliary display unit 65, it is preferable to display it in the same position on that display screen. However, if it is desired to make the presence and role of the notification difficult to notice, thereby enhancing the sense of superiority of players who are aware of it, it is also possible to configure the display position of the specific notification to be different before and after the change. Incidentally, it is preferable for the specific notification to continue at least until the consecutive presentation executed after the end of the second BB state has ended (until the final game of the consecutive presentation has ended).

The configurations described in (40) above can also be applied to the first and second embodiments. That is, the specific notification may be made when the consecutive performances for this precursor are executed, and if the consecutive performances are stopped or interrupted due to a transition to the second BB state, the specific notification may continue even after the stoppage or interruption.

(41) In the fourth embodiment described above, a winning notification may be made not in the final game of the consecutive performance for the main premonition, but in a predetermined intermediate game. In such a configuration, if the second BB state is entered before the winning notification is executed, the presentation mode of the consecutive performance may be changed to that for a pseudo premonition, and if the second BB state is entered after the winning notification is executed, the presentation mode may be left unchanged, and the consecutive performance for the main premonition may be continued as is, or the consecutive performance currently being executed may be stopped or interrupted.

Furthermore, in a configuration where a reach symbol can be stopped on each of reels 32L-32R when in a winning state such as CZ mode, if the reel transitions to the second BB state before the reach symbol stops, the presentation mode of the continuous performance may be changed to one for a pseudo-premonition, and if the reel transitions to the second BB state after the reach symbol stops, the presentation mode may not be changed and the continuous performance for the real premonition may continue as is, or the continuous performance currently being executed may be stopped or interrupted. Note that a reach symbol here refers to a specific symbol combination that can be stopped on a pay line when a win has occurred in CZ mode (excluding second BB), but cannot be stopped in a non-winning state; it is a miss symbol that does not correspond to any winning combination.

(42) In the fourth embodiment described above, when changing the presentation style of the continuous performance to one for a pseudo-premonition, the type of continuous performance for a real premonition that was being executed at the time of transition to the second BB state is identified in order to match the type of continuous performance before the change. However, it is also possible to identify the type that was set by the setting process of step S2209.

(43) In the fourth embodiment, the presentation mode is changed so that a loss notification is issued when the second BB state is entered during the execution of the continuous presentation for a real premonition. However, a different notification from the loss notification, such as a draw presentation (draw notification), may also be issued. The draw presentation may be a dedicated presentation for when the premonition mode is extended during the continuous presentation. In this case, the execution of the draw presentation allows the player to recognize that they have won in the CZ mode or other modes. The draw presentation may also be configured to be executed in the continuous presentation for a real premonition when the premonition mode is not extended, or in the continuous presentation for a pseudo premonition. In this case, in the continuous presentation for a real premonition, a win presentation (win notification) is executed after the draw presentation, and in the continuous presentation for a pseudo premonition, a loss presentation (loss notification) is executed after the draw presentation.

(44) In the fifth embodiment, when executing a continuous effect using the remaining premonition mode after the second BB state, the continuous effect is configured to start from the final game of the second BB bonus game. However, the continuous effect may also be configured to start when the number of remaining bonus games reaches a predetermined number of games, which is two or more. In this case, the predetermined number of games is set to a value (e.g., two games) obtained by subtracting the number of remaining premonition mode games after the second BB state (e.g., one game) from the number of execution games for the continuous effect using the remaining premonition mode after the second BB state (e.g., three games). In this case, the number of execution games for the continuous effect may first be determined by lottery or the like without reference to the number of remaining premonition mode games after the second BB state, and then the number of games missing, calculated by subtracting the number of remaining premonition mode games from the determined number of execution games, may be set as the predetermined number of games.

Since the number of games played in a bonus game fluctuates, it is difficult to accurately determine the number of games remaining. However, for example, the number of games played in a bonus game can be determined or estimated based on a design expectation or a performance average, and the number of games played since the bonus game began can be subtracted from that value. When the subtracted value reaches the predetermined number of games, the continuous performance begins. In this case, although there is a greater chance of deviation from the premonition mode compared to when the continuous performance begins from the final game, a larger number of games can be added, and the limit on the number of games played prevents the continuous performance using the remaining premonition mode after the second BB state from feeling bland.

Note that if the specified or estimated number of bonus game runs does not match the actual number of games run, and the former is less than the latter, the number of remaining games in the premonition mode will be greater than the number of games remaining in the continuous performance at the end of the bonus game. As a result, the premonition mode will end after the end of the continuous performance, leading to a situation where the system does not transition to CZ mode, etc., even if a win notification is executed in the continuous performance. In this case, as in the first and second embodiments above, a configuration may be adopted in which the win notification in the continuous performance is delayed by executing a preliminary effect related to the continuous performance currently being executed.

In this case, the preliminary effects may be performed a number of times or for a length that corresponds to the surplus of the remaining number of games in the premonition mode compared to the remaining number of games in the consecutive effects. Furthermore, the preliminary effects may be performed in the game following the end of the bonus game, or in an even later game (at a convenient point in the flow of the consecutive effects). Incidentally, the surplus amount can be determined at the final game of the bonus games or at the end of the bonus games. Therefore, the preliminary effects setting process may be performed when the final game of the bonus games starts or when the bonus games end.

(45) In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of remaining games is determined based on the number of coins remaining until the maximum payout limit for the bonus game is reached, and a determination is made as to whether the number of remaining games is a predetermined number (1 (final game) in the fifth embodiment). However, for example, if the number of games to be played in the bonus game can be uniquely determined, the number of remaining games may be determined based on the number of games played since the bonus game began.

(46) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the second ending effect currently being executed is stopped due to a transition to the second BB state, the ending effect is not executed after the second BB state ends. However, the ending effect may also be executed after the second BB state ends. With this configuration, the ending effect after the end of the second BB state is executed to the end, so even if the previous second ending effect is stopped midway due to a transition to the second BB state, the player can be appropriately notified of the end of the advantageous zone.

In this case, the ending performance after the end of the second BB state may be configured to continue the interrupted second ending performance, or the ending performance after the end of the second BB state may be configured to execute a new ending performance that is not a continuation of the interrupted second ending performance.

It may also be possible to configure the system to switch between continuing the canceled second ending presentation and executing a new ending presentation. For example, if multiple types of bonus games with different lengths (maximum payout amounts) are provided, the above switching can be performed depending on the type of bonus game (in other words, the length of the bonus game) to which the game transitions during the execution of the second ending presentation. Specifically, in the case of a bonus game with a short execution period, the stopped ending presentation can be continued as the ending presentation after the bonus game, and in the case of a bonus game with a long execution period, a new ending presentation can be executed as the ending presentation after the bonus game.

In addition, in the second BB bonus game, the net increase in coins per game is a negative value, resulting in a decrease in the number of medals, so the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone after the end of the second BB state (the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the increase is reached) is likely to be greater than it was when transitioning to the second BB state. Therefore, when executing an ending effect after the end of the second BB state, it is a good idea to re-assess the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone (the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the increase is reached) and execute the ending effect according to that number of remaining games.

In addition, the player may be able to select whether to continue the interrupted second ending performance or to perform a new ending performance using a performance switch 66 or the like.

(47) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the game transitions to the second BB state while the first ending performance is being performed, the ending performance is continued. However, it may also be stopped or interrupted in the same way as the second ending performance. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the first ending performance is continued solely due to its relationship with the premonition mode, and this does not deny the possibility of stopping or interrupting the first ending performance for reasons other than the premonition mode.

(48) In the sixth embodiment described above, the second ending presentation is configured so that the end notification (text notification such as "Congratulations" or "END") is executed in the final game of the ending presentation. However, the end notification may be executed over multiple games (for example, five games prior to the end of the advantageous period). In such a configuration, if the second BB state is entered after the end notification is executed (started), the end of the advantageous period has already been notified, so the second ending presentation may continue as is. The second ending presentation being executed may be stopped or interrupted only if the second BB state is entered before the end notification is executed (started).

(49) In the sixth embodiment described above, an ending effect corresponding to the end of a favorable zone was exemplified, but the ending effect may also correspond to the end of a game state other than a favorable zone.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the ending effect is implemented by repeatedly playing an animated video for a certain period of time. However, at least a portion of the ending effect may be configured to progress in accordance with the execution of the game. In such a configuration, if the number of games remaining for the ending effect may increase midway, as in the seventh embodiment, it will be necessary to address this situation. For example, as in the first and second embodiments, it is advisable to execute a number of or length of preliminary effects (preliminary effects related to the currently executing ending effect) in accordance with the increase in the number of games remaining.

(51) In the seventh embodiment, the determination of whether to cancel the ongoing second ending presentation is based on whether the number of games remaining until the upper limit is fewer than 30 (the expected number of games to be played in the bonus game). However, the determination may instead be based on whether the number of remaining games is smaller than the expected number of games to be played in the bonus game (for example, 10 games). With this configuration, for example, in a situation where an advantageous zone ends during a bonus game, if continuing the second ending presentation ensures sufficient time for the bonus presentation, the second ending presentation can be continued; on the other hand, if continuing the second ending presentation would result in insufficient time for the bonus presentation, the second ending presentation can be canceled. In other words, it becomes possible to determine whether to cancel or continue the second ending presentation by further taking into account the execution status of the bonus presentation.

(52) In the seventh embodiment, when determining whether to stop the second ending effect currently being executed, it may be configured to determine whether a reversal phenomenon will occur (whether the upper limit number of games is reached before the upper limit increase number). Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ending effect is continued if a reversal phenomenon occurs during the bonus game (if the upper limit number of games is reached during the bonus game), but the ending effect may also be continued if a reversal phenomenon occurs after the bonus game (if the upper limit number of games is reached after the bonus game before the upper limit increase number). In this case, the ending effect is executed across bonus games.

(53) In the seventh embodiment described above, the first ending presentation and the second ending presentation may have different presentation modes. In this case, if it is determined that the currently running second ending presentation should be continued, the second ending presentation may be continued as is, or the ending presentation may be changed to the first ending presentation and continued. However, the former configuration is preferable in order to avoid giving the player an unnatural impression.

(54) In the seventh embodiment described above, a first notification (for example, a notification informing or suggesting the number of remaining reels until the upper limit of the increase) that allows the player to recognize or infer that the advantageous zone will end when the upper limit of the increase number is reached may be made during the execution of the second ending presentation. In such a configuration, if the second BB state is entered during the execution of the second ending presentation and it is determined that the ending presentation should continue, the first notification may be not made (erased) during the continued ending presentation (the ending presentation that ends when the upper limit of the number of games is reached).

Furthermore, the continued ending presentation may be configured to issue a second notification (for example, a notification that tells or suggests the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games) that allows the player to recognize or infer that the advantageous zone will end when the maximum number of games is reached. In this case, the second notification may also be issued for an ending presentation that was originally started as a first ending presentation.

(55) In the above embodiments, CZ mode, AT mode, and an additional number of games in AT mode were given as examples of special states that are advantageous to the player, but special states are not limited to these and may also be, for example, ART mode, etc.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous period ends when the number of games in the advantageous period AG reaches the upper limit number of games or when the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous period MY reaches the upper limit number of increases. However, the advantageous period may also end when the AT mode ends, for example.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is set to a single, predetermined fixed value, but multiple upper limit numbers of games may be set, and the advantageous zone may end at the upper limit number of games selected from among them by lottery, a set value, etc. Furthermore, the upper limit number of increase is not limited to a single, predetermined fixed value, but multiple upper limit numbers of games may be set, and the advantageous zone may end at the upper limit number of increase selected from among them by lottery, a set value, etc.

(58) In the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals decreases was exemplified. However, the number of medals may not increase (no increase or decrease), or may increase slightly (the medal increase rate is lower than in AT mode). Note that a bonus game in which the number of medals increases slightly may be one in which the expected net increase in number of medals per game is less than 0.5.

Furthermore, in terms of the change in medal increase rate from the previous game state, it may not be a slight increase, but rather a normal increase in medals (which is advantageous to the player). In this case, the medal increase rate may be higher than in AT mode, or it may be lower than in AT mode but higher than in the normal game state (normal mode or CZ mode).

(59) In the above embodiments, a bonus game was given as an example of a specific state, but it may be something other than a bonus game as long as it extends the premonition mode.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may also be held in the normal zone. In this case, the advantage of the advantageous zone is guaranteed by making it less likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won in the normal zone than in the advantageous zone.

(61) In the above embodiments, the continuous effects are implemented using notification means such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. However, the continuous effects may also be implemented using notification means other than these notification means. In particular, by using separate notification means for implementing the push order notification effects and the specific role notification effects and the continuous effects, different events that are of interest to the player, such as whether or not to transition to AT mode and whether or not a player missed a push order bell or a specific role when a specific role was won, can be notified using separate notification means. For example, this can prevent players from paying too much attention to the continuous effects and accidentally operating the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell or a specific role is won. Furthermore, the ending effects may also be implemented using notification means other than the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

Furthermore, the continuous performances, preliminary performances, and ending performances are not limited to those performed using images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, but may be light-emitting performances using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or may be reel performances using decorative movable bodies (movable reels) for moving performances, or may be a combination of these. Furthermore, they do not necessarily have to be visual, but may be auditory, using sound effects, for example.

(62) In the above embodiments, a game played in a 3-bet game while the second BB won in a 2-bet game is carried over has been described as a normal game. However, a game played in a 2-bet game while the first BB won in a 3-bet game is carried over may also be a normal game, or a second or third bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may also be a normal game. A game played in a 2-bet game while the second BB is carried over may also be a normal game, or a game played in a 3-bet game while the first BB is carried over may also be a normal game. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a game progresses by switching between these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, a first switching trigger may be used to switch, for example, from any of the above games played in a 2-bet game to any of the above games played in a 3-bet game, and a second switching trigger may be used to switch, for example, from any of the above games played in a 3-bet game to any of the above games played in a 2-bet game.

(63) The probability of winning the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone and the game results that trigger the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone are not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiments.

In addition, while the configuration is such that the player is transferred to the advantageous zone in the game in which the player wins the advantageous zone transfer lottery, the configuration may also be such that the player is transferred to the advantageous zone in the game following the game in which the player wins the advantageous zone transfer lottery, or such that there may be a predetermined number of games between the game in which the player wins the advantageous zone transfer lottery and the game in which the player transfers to the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, while the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is configured to begin displaying in the game that transitions to the advantageous zone, it is also possible to configure the eighth display segment N8 to begin displaying in the game following the game that transitions to the advantageous zone, or to configure the system so that there can be a predetermined number of games between the game that transitions to the advantageous zone and the game that initiates the display of the eighth display segment N8.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the ball payout rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 having the highest ball payout rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner in which balls (game media) payout change depending on the setting value. For example, the ball payout rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 being the same, while the ball payout rates of other setting values may be different. Furthermore, settings 1, 3, and 5 may be configured to have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball payout, while settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball payout. Furthermore, settings 1 and 5 may be configured to increase ball payout by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease by a predetermined amount over a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 may take longer than settings 1 and 5 to increase by the predetermined amount and take less time than settings 1 and 5 to decrease by the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have almost no increase or decrease in ball payout. In these cases, the ball payout rate of each setting value may be the same.

(65) While a slot machine has been described that has three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, be a slot machine that has five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the perspective of preventing erroneous operation when stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Also, while a slot machine has been described that has one active line when the number of bets is three, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, have five active lines.

(66) While a specific example has been given of a slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

For example, in pachinko machines or ball-operated reel gaming machines, the configuration may have multiple settings that change the payout rate, etc., and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied to suggest or teach these settings. In this case, in pachinko machines that have high-probability and low-probability states where the probability of winning a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, and in pachinko machines that have high-ball entry states and low-ball entry states where the rate of balls entering a predetermined entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied. Furthermore, in pachinko machines, the period during which a 3-bet game is played during the waiting period of the premonition mode, CZ mode, etc. (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of these modes is updated) may be applied to the period during which the first special symbol is played (the variable display of the first special symbol), and the period during the waiting period during which a 2-bet game or a bonus game in the second BB state is played (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of the above modes is not updated) may be applied to the period during which the second special symbol is played (the variable display of the second special symbol).

(67) In the above embodiments, examples have been given of gaming machines in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media and setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. However, this does not exclude medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, it is possible to set the number of bets on a game using virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) and start playing, and to award virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to an external device.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned pachinko machines may not only be pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-type pachinko machines in which game balls are not ejected outside the machine. In such sealed-type pachinko machines, it is advisable to configure them to announce information indicating, for example, the number of winning balls.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups have been made in response to the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "In the background art, which states that "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the results of the internal lottery (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)," "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to increase the entertainment value of the game, and in this regard, there is still room for improvement."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A special determination means (a function that executes AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101) that executes a special determination of whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination trigger (winning the trigger role of the transition lottery);
a waiting period setting means (a function of executing the process of setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and the process of managing the second number of games (a process of setting the CZ counter)) that can set a waiting period (premonition mode, CZ mode) so that when the result of the special determination is a specific result that corresponds to causing the special state, at least one of a transition to the special state and a specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to winning the specific result is waited for over multiple games;
When the waiting period has elapsed, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the transition trigger role of the AT mode) is established after the waiting period has elapsed, a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
a specific effect setting means (a function of setting information of this premonition scenario in a scenario data table by a display control device 81) for setting a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a plurality of games when the standby period is set by the standby period setting means so that the specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a plurality of games is started in a predetermined game during the standby period, and the specific notification is executed in a specific game after the predetermined game in the specific effect;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the specific effect on a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information on the present premonition scenario set in the scenario data table);
A specific means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101 (a premonition counter and a CZ counter are not updated in the case of a two-bet game)) that makes the waiting period longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means when a predetermined condition (a game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is met at least during the execution of the specific effect;
a delay means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process and a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81 (a function of executing the performance of this premonition preliminary scenario)) for delaying the execution game of the specific notification so that the execution game of the specific notification will be a game after the specific game set by the specific effect setting means when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the result of a special determination based on the fulfillment of a predetermined trigger becomes a specific result, a waiting period is set during which at least one of a transition to a special state advantageous to the player and a specific notification that the specific result has been won is awaited. During this waiting period, a specific effect is executed over multiple games, and the specific notification is made in a specific game during that specific effect. Then, if a predetermined transition condition is met after the waiting period has elapsed or after the lapse of the waiting period, the gaming state transitions to the special state. In other words, after a specific notification is made during the specific effect and the player is notified that they have won, the gaming state transitions to the special state or becomes a state in which a transition is possible (a state in which a transition is made when a transition condition is met).

In this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of at least a specific effect, the waiting period is extended and the end game of that period is delayed. However, because the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are misaligned. This can lead to the inconvenience of the player not transitioning to a special state despite the specific notification informing them of a win, raising concerns that this could reduce the player's trust in the effects. In this regard, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect, the game in which the specific notification is executed is delayed so that the specific notification is executed in a game later than the specific game originally set. This allows the timing of the specific notification to be delayed in line with the extension of the waiting period, eliminating the misalignment between the waiting period and the specific effect. This effectively prevents the above inconveniences from occurring and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Note that this feature may further include the following prerequisite configuration: "A gaming machine having a plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which pictures (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the pictures is stopped when a stop condition is met, and in which the variable display of the pictures is started in a plurality of the variable display areas and stopped in a plurality of the variable display areas, counting as one game."

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, wherein the delay means delays the running game relative to the specific game by the same period as the period by which the waiting period is extended by the specification means.

With the above configuration, the execution game for the specific notification is delayed by the amount of the extended waiting period, allowing for optimal synchronization between the waiting period and the specific presentation. This makes it possible to issue the specific notification at the intended timing relative to the waiting period (in other words, the timing designed during presentation design), even if the waiting period is extended.

Feature A3: When the predetermined condition is met during the standby period, the specifying means sets the standby period to be longer than the period set by the standby period setting means,
A gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that it is equipped with a second delay means (a function of executing processing for waiting for continuous effects by the display control device 81) that delays the start of the specific effect if the specified condition is met during the waiting period and before the specific effect is executed.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the standby period, the standby period is extended. This means that a discrepancy can occur between the remaining standby period and the specific performance, not only during the execution of a specific performance, but also if the predetermined condition is met before the specific performance is executed. In this regard, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the standby period before the execution of a specific performance, the start of the specific performance is delayed, making it possible to effectively eliminate the discrepancy between the remaining standby period and the specific performance, whether the standby period is extended during or before the execution of a specific performance.

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any of Features A1 to A3, wherein the delay means includes a preliminary effect execution means (a function for executing continuous effect setting processing and continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that executes a preliminary effect related to the specific effect (a performance of the premonition preliminary scenario) if the predetermined condition is met during execution of the specific effect.

In the above configuration, a preliminary effect is executed if a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being executed, so gaps in the effect caused by delaying the specific notification can be filled by the preliminary effect. In this case, for example, if the preliminary effect is configured to execute an effect unrelated to the specific effect, it may give the player the impression that the specific effect has suddenly ended. In particular, for players who were watching the specific effect hoping to win, this may give the impression that their win has disappeared, which could confuse the player. In this regard, in this configuration, an effect related to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, so the preliminary effect can effectively connect the specific effects executed before and after the preliminary effect. This prevents the player from feeling like the specific effect has been interrupted, and effectively reduces player confusion.

Note that effects related to specific effects may be those that remind (remind) the player of the specific effect. Specifically, possible effects include those that display the same information as the specific effect (for example, characters that appear in the specific effect also appear in the preliminary effect), or those that share a common concept (for example, if the specific effect is a battle effect, the preliminary effect may include notifications that suggest subsequent developments or notifications that increase anticipation for the battle effect).

Feature A5: When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101) is provided that updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of a game;
The specifying means prevents the update means from updating the remaining number of games when the predetermined condition is met,
The gaming machine described in feature A4 is characterized in that the delay means executes the preliminary effect in response to a period in which the remaining number of games is not updated by the identification means.

In the above configuration, the preliminary effects are executed for the amount of time during the waiting period during which the number of remaining games is not updated, allowing the waiting period and the specific effects to be optimally synchronized while the preliminary effects connect (extend) the specific effects.

Feature A6. The specific effect is configured so that the effect content progresses as the game is played,
The gaming machine described in Feature A4 or Feature A5 is characterized in that the specific effect execution means executes an effect that is a continuation of the specific effect executed before the execution of the preliminary effect in a game in which the specified condition is not met after the preliminary effect is executed by the preliminary effect execution means.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being executed, a preliminary effect is inserted into the specific effect, and the subsequent specific effect is resumed after the preliminary effect is executed. In other words, the specific effect that would have been executed if the preliminary effect had not been executed (if the predetermined condition had not been met) is executed after the preliminary effect is executed, so the flow of effects leading up to the specific notification can be maintained in the same way as if the preliminary effect had not been executed. Therefore, the timing of the specific notification can be delayed while maintaining consistency in effects between when a preliminary effect is executed and when it is not executed.

Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which a dedicated effect separate from the specific effect is executed after the execution of a preliminary effect, it is necessary to perform setting processing to execute the dedicated effect and prepare the effect data for that purpose (storing video data, etc.). However, with this configuration, the settings and effect data for the specific effect can be reused, eliminating the need for setting processing and preparing effect data for the dedicated effect. This effectively prevents an increase in the processing load on effect control and an increase in data volume.

Furthermore, for example, if a dedicated effect separate from the specific effect is executed after a preliminary effect is executed, there is a risk that new measures will be required to deal with what to do if a predetermined condition is met again while that dedicated effect is being executed. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to deal with this by simply inserting a preliminary effect each time, eliminating the need for new measures. In other words, there is also the advantage of being able to flexibly respond even when a predetermined condition is met multiple times.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A4 to A6, wherein the preliminary effect execution means includes means for executing, as at least part of the preliminary effect, at least part of an effect that is executed as part of the specific effect.

In the above configuration, at least a portion of the effect executed as part of the specific effect is used as at least a portion of the auxiliary effect, making it possible to execute auxiliary effects that are highly related to the specific effect. Furthermore, because the effect data for the specific effect can be used as the effect data for the auxiliary effect, it is possible to effectively suppress the increase in data volume associated with the auxiliary effect.

Feature A8. The specific effects include at least a first specific effect (first consecutive effect) and a second specific effect (second consecutive effect) different from the first specific effect;
As the preliminary effects, at least a first preliminary effect corresponding to the first specific effect (a performance of the main precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the first consecutive effect) and a second preliminary effect corresponding to the second specific effect (a performance of the main precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second consecutive effect) which is different from the first preliminary effect are provided;
A gaming machine described in any of features A4 to A7, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means executes the first preliminary performance if the specified condition is met during execution of the first specific performance, and executes the second preliminary performance if the specified condition is met during execution of the second specific performance.

With the above configuration, a preliminary effect corresponding to the type of specific effect currently being executed is executed, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when a preliminary effect is executed and from losing the impression that a specific effect is currently being executed. This prevents the player from getting the impression that the specific effect has been interrupted, and effectively reduces player confusion. This configuration is also ideal for executing preliminary effects that are closely related to the specific effect.

Feature A9. The specific effect is configured so that the effect content progresses as the game is played,
As the preliminary performance, a plurality of types of preliminary performance (performance of the main premonition preliminary scenario) are provided,
Each of the preliminary effects has a presentation style corresponding to the execution order of the effects (present premonition scenario effects) executed in each game as the specific effects,
A gaming machine described in any of features A4 to A8, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means, when executing the preliminary performance instead of a predetermined performance (for example, a performance of the main premonition scenario H-2) executed as the specific performance, is equipped with a means for executing the preliminary performance (a performance of the main premonition preliminary scenario H-2) corresponding to the execution order of the predetermined performance (a function for executing each performance of the main premonition scenario and the main premonition preliminary scenario based on the value of the continuous performance counter by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the specific effects are configured so that the content of the effects progresses as the game is played, and multiple types of preliminary effects are provided to correspond to the execution order of each effect executed in sequence during the specific effect. When a preliminary effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect, if a predetermined condition is not met, the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order of the effect (predetermined effect) that was scheduled to be executed in that game is executed. For example, if a configuration were in place in which a standardized effect was executed regardless of which game during the specific effect the preliminary effect was executed in, there is a concern that the flow of the specific effect would be interrupted by the preliminary effect, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or have difficulty understanding the content of the specific effect. In this regard, with this configuration, preliminary effects can be executed with content that is in line with the flow of the specific effect, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the flow of the specific effect from being interrupted by the preliminary effect. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable or having difficulty understanding the content of the specific effect, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the preliminary effect from reducing its effectiveness.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, wherein the specific effect execution means executes the specified effect in a game after the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order is executed if the specified condition is not met in that game.

With the above configuration, the effect that should have been executed as the specific effect is executed after the preliminary effect is executed. For example, if the specific effect is a story-based effect, if part of the specific effect is missing, the flow of the effect becomes difficult to understand, but with this configuration, such missing effect is avoided. Therefore, the flow of the effect leading up to the specific notification can be maintained in the same way as if the preliminary effect had not been executed, and the timing of the execution of the specific notification can be delayed while ensuring consistency in the effect between when the preliminary effect is executed and when it is not executed.

Feature A11. A gaming machine described in any of Features A4 to A10, wherein the preliminary effect execution means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is met (a function for executing processing for executing consecutive effects by the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment).

With the above configuration, the preliminary effect is executed in a game when a predetermined condition is met, so each time the waiting period is extended, that extension is filled with the preliminary effect. This makes it possible to synchronize the waiting period and the specific effect with a simple configuration.

Feature A12. A gaming machine described in any of Features A4 to A11, wherein the preliminary effect execution means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game during the waiting period that follows the game in which the predetermined condition is met (a function for executing processing for executing consecutive effects by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being executed, the continuation of the specific effect takes priority, and the preliminary effect is executed later. This makes it possible to execute the preliminary effect at a convenient stopping point in the specific effect. This prevents the flow of the effect from being disrupted by executing the preliminary effect at an awkward timing.

Feature A13. The gaming machine described in Feature A12, wherein the preliminary effect execution means includes a determining means (a function that executes preliminary effect counter increment processing by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment) that determines the number of games for which the waiting period has been extended by the specifying means, and a means (a function that executes preliminary effect processing by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment) that executes the preliminary effect in a game that occurs after the game in which the predetermined condition is met and that is during the waiting period, in accordance with the number of games determined by the determining means.

For example, if a predetermined condition is met multiple times, there is a risk that the progress of the specific effect will be frequently interrupted by the execution of a preliminary effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the extension of the standby effect that occurs during the specific effect is identified, and preliminary effects of a length corresponding to that extension are executed all at once. This minimizes the interruption of the specific effect due to preliminary effects, and effectively prevents the player from understanding the development of the effect.

Feature A14. A backup effect setting means (a function of setting information of the premonition backup scenario in a scenario data table by the main control device 101) that performs setting processing of the backup effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means is provided,
the auxiliary effect execution means executes the auxiliary effect based on a setting result of the auxiliary effect setting means when the predetermined condition is established;
A gaming machine described in any of features A4 to A13, characterized in that the preliminary performance setting means is equipped with a means for executing the setting process of the preliminary performance in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary performance is executed (a function for setting information on the premonition preliminary scenario corresponding to the second game or later at the start of one game of the continuous performance).

With the above configuration, the preliminary effect setup process is performed in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed, allowing the preliminary effect to be executed smoothly. This effectively prevents processing slowdowns, even if the control process is under high load when, for example, a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect.

This feature may further include the feature that "the preliminary effect setting means performs the setting process for the preliminary effect in the game in which the setting process for the specific effect is performed by the specific effect setting means." In this case, the preliminary effect can be smoothly executed when executing the preliminary effect in the second game or later of the specific effect, and the preliminary effect can also be executed according to the settings when executing the preliminary effect in the starting game (first game) of the specific effect.

Note that with feature A8, which executes a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the type of specific effect, and feature A9, which executes a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order, the preliminary effect to be executed changes depending on the timing of the preliminary effect execution. This means that it is necessary to select a preliminary effect with content appropriate for each situation, which raises concerns about increased processing load and the risk of processing slowdowns. By applying this feature to these configurations, it becomes possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature A15. A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific win notification process by the display control device 81) that sets a second specific effect (a continuous effect for a pseudo-omen) to be executed over multiple games when a predetermined condition (winning the execution lottery for a pseudo-omen) is met in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means;
A second specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features A4 to A14, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means is provided with a means for not executing the preliminary performance if the specified condition is met during the execution of the second specific performance.

To avoid immediately determining whether a specific result has been won at the time the specific effect is executed, a function to execute a specific effect (second specific effect) that does not require the specific result to be won may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period, and if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period, this configuration does not execute the backup effect. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of setting up and executing backup effects, and reduce the load on the control process.

Feature A16: A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific win notification process by the display control device 81) that sets a second specific effect (a continuous effect for a pseudo-omen) to be executed over multiple games when a predetermined condition (winning the execution lottery for a pseudo-omen) is met in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means;
A second specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features A4 to A14, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means is provided with a means for executing the preliminary performance when the specified condition is met during the execution of the second specific performance.

To avoid immediately determining whether a specific result has been won at the time the specific effect is executed, a function to execute a specific effect (second specific effect) that does not require the specific result to be won may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period, but this configuration is configured to execute a preliminary effect even if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period. This prevents the presence or absence of a preliminary effect from revealing whether a specific result has been won in advance, making it possible to maintain the player's anticipation for the outcome of the specific effect for a long time.

Feature A17. A first device (main control device 101),
a second device (display control device 81) electrically connected to the first device and operating based on a signal from the first device;
Equipped with
The first device is
The device includes at least the special determination means, the standby period setting means, the special state transition means, and the identification means,
an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games to be played by the main control device 101) for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of a game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means;
The specifying means prevents the update means from updating the remaining number of games when the predetermined condition is met,
the second device includes the specific effect setting means, the specific effect execution means, and the delay means;
The first device is provided with an output means (a function of executing a command output process by the main control device 101) for outputting a first signal (premonition game number update command, CZ game number update command) corresponding to the update of the remaining game number by the update means, or a second signal (premonition game number non-update command, CZ game number non-update command) corresponding to the update of the remaining game number not being executed by the update means,
The second device is provided with a grasping means (a function of executing a process for executing a continuous effect by the display control device 81) for grasping that the update of the remaining number of games will not be executed based on the fact that the first signal is not output by the output means or the second signal is output,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the delay means delays the execution of the game based on the determination result of the determination means.

The above configuration includes a first device and a second device with the first device as the host device, and the control processing related to game presentation is delegated to the second device, thereby reducing the processing load on the first device. However, because the number of games remaining in the waiting period is managed by the first device, there is a possibility of discrepancies in the recognition of the number of games remaining between the first and second devices, raising concerns that the execution game of a specific notification may not be appropriately delayed in response to an extension of the waiting period. In this regard, the present configuration is configured so that the first device outputs a first signal indicating that the number of games remaining in the waiting period has been updated, or a second signal indicating that the number of games remaining in the waiting period has not been updated, to the second device. In this case, if a predetermined condition is met and the number of games remaining in the waiting period has not been updated, either the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. Therefore, the second device can determine whether the number of games remaining in the waiting period has been updated on the first device by checking whether the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. This prevents discrepancies in the recognition of the number of games remaining, and makes it possible to appropriately delay the execution of a specific notification game in response to an extension of the waiting period, even in a configuration in which processing is shared between the first and second devices.

This feature may further include a configuration in which "at least one of the first signal and the second signal includes information on the number of games remaining, or the output means includes means for outputting a third signal including information on the number of games remaining." With this configuration, even if a discrepancy occurs, it is possible to correct the discrepancy in the second device based on the first signal, the second signal, or the third signal.

Feature A18. The device further includes an update unit (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101) that updates the number of games remaining during the waiting period when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting unit, based on the fact that a game is started with the number of bets set to the first number (3),
The specifying means prevents the update means from updating the remaining number of games when the predetermined condition is met,
A gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the specified condition is that the game starts with the number of bets set to a second number (2) different from the first number.

In this configuration, the waiting period may or may not be extended depending on the number of bets placed when playing a game. For example, when a player is inserting gaming media for maintenance, it is common for them to accidentally start the game by inserting a second number of gaming media, even though they intended to start the game by inserting a first number of gaming media. In this case, it is possible to alert the player and urge them not to start the game with the second number, but this could distract the player and make it difficult for them to concentrate on the special effects. In this regard, in this configuration, one of the above features A1 to A16 is applied to such an extension of the waiting period based on the player's operation, and the gaming machine takes action. This allows for player operation errors (mistakes in the number of bets), allowing the player to enjoy the special effects without worrying about the number of bets.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H16, and features I1 to I13, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination with each other to each of the above features A1 to A18. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group B>
Feature B1. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (winning the transition lottery trigger role), a special judgment is made as to whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player (a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT additional processing by the main control device 101);
a waiting period setting means (a function of executing the process of setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and the process of managing the second number of games (a process of setting the CZ counter)) that can set a waiting period (premonition mode, CZ mode) so that when the result of the special determination is a specific result that corresponds to causing the special state, at least one of a transition to the special state and a specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to winning the specific result is waited for over multiple games;
When the waiting period has elapsed, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger role) is established after the waiting period has elapsed, a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect setting means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) sets a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over multiple games so that it is executed during the waiting period;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the specific effect on a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information on the present premonition scenario set in the scenario data table);
A specific means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101 (a premonition counter and a CZ counter are not updated in the case of a two-bet game)) that makes the waiting period longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means when a predetermined condition (a game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is met at least during the execution of the specific effect;
A preliminary performance execution means (a function of executing a continuous performance setting process and a continuous performance execution process by the display control device 81) that executes a preliminary performance (a performance of the present premonition preliminary scenario) related to the specific performance when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific performance;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the result of a special determination based on the fulfillment of a predetermined trigger becomes a specific result, a waiting period is set during which at least one of a transition to a special state advantageous to the player and a specific notification that the specific result has been won is awaited. During this waiting period, a specific effect is executed over multiple games in response to the winning of the specific result. Then, after the waiting period has elapsed or if a predetermined transition condition is met after the lapse of the waiting period, the game state transitions to the special state. In other words, after the player is notified by the specific effect that they have won the specific result, the game state transitions to or becomes a state that can be transitioned to the special state (a state that can be transitioned to when the transition condition is met).

In this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of at least a specific effect, the waiting period is extended and the end game of that period is delayed. However, because the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the timing of the winning notification for the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are misaligned. This can lead to the inconvenience of the game not transitioning to a special state despite a winning notification being issued, raising concerns that this could reduce players' trust in the effects. In this regard, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect, a preliminary effect is executed in place of the specific effect, and the winning notification for the specific effect is delayed accordingly. In other words, the timing of the winning notification can be delayed in line with the extension of the waiting period, eliminating the misalignment between the waiting period and the specific effect. This effectively prevents the above inconveniences from occurring and increases the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, for example, if the configuration is such that an effect unrelated to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, there is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the specific effect has suddenly ended. In particular, for players who were watching the specific effect in the hope of winning, this could give the impression that the win has disappeared, which could confuse the player. In this regard, with this configuration, an effect related to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, so the specific effects executed before and after the preliminary effect can be suitably connected by the preliminary effect. This prevents the player from getting the impression that the specific effect has been interrupted, and makes it possible to suitably reduce player confusion.

Note that effects related to specific effects may be those that remind (remind) the player of the specific effect. Specifically, possible effects include those that display the same information as the specific effect (for example, characters that appear in the specific effect also appear in the preliminary effect), or those that share a common concept (for example, if the specific effect is a battle effect, the preliminary effect may include notifications that suggest subsequent developments or notifications that increase anticipation for the battle effect).

Furthermore, this feature may further include the following prerequisite configuration: "A gaming machine having a plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which pictures (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the pictures is stopped when a stop condition is met, and in which the variable display of the pictures is started in a plurality of the variable display areas and stopped in a plurality of the variable display areas, counting as one game."

Feature B2. The specific effects include at least a first specific effect (first consecutive effect) and a second specific effect (second consecutive effect) different from the first specific effect;
As the preliminary effects, at least a first preliminary effect corresponding to the first specific effect (a performance of the main precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the first consecutive effect) and a second preliminary effect corresponding to the second specific effect (a performance of the main precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second consecutive effect) which is different from the first preliminary effect are provided;
The gaming machine described in feature B1 is characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means executes the first preliminary performance if the specified condition is met during execution of the first specific performance, and executes the second preliminary performance if the specified condition is met during execution of the second specific performance.

With the above configuration, a preliminary effect corresponding to the type of specific effect currently being executed is executed, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the preliminary effect is executed and losing the impression that a specific effect is currently being executed. This prevents the player from getting the impression that the specific effect has been interrupted, and effectively reduces player confusion.

Feature B3: The specific effect is configured so that the effect content progresses as the game is executed,
As the preliminary performance, a plurality of types of preliminary performance (performance of the main premonition preliminary scenario) are provided,
Each of the preliminary effects has a presentation style corresponding to the execution order of the effects (present premonition scenario effects) executed in each game as the specific effects,
The gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2 is characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means, when executing the preliminary performance instead of a predetermined performance (for example, a performance of the main premonition scenario H-2) executed as the specific performance, is equipped with a means for executing the preliminary performance (a performance of the main premonition preliminary scenario H-2) corresponding to the execution order of the predetermined performance (a function for executing each performance of the main premonition scenario and the main premonition preliminary scenario based on the value of the continuous performance counter by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the specific effects are configured so that the content of the effects progresses as the game is played, and multiple types of preliminary effects are provided to correspond to the execution order of each effect executed in sequence during the specific effect. When a preliminary effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect, if a predetermined condition is not met, the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order of the effect (predetermined effect) that was scheduled to be executed in that game is executed. For example, if a configuration were in place in which a standardized effect was executed regardless of which game during the specific effect the preliminary effect was executed in, there is a concern that the flow of the specific effect would be interrupted by the preliminary effect, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or have difficulty understanding the content of the specific effect. In this regard, with this configuration, preliminary effects can be executed with content that is in line with the flow of the specific effect, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the flow of the specific effect from being interrupted by the preliminary effect. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable or having difficulty understanding the content of the specific effect, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the preliminary effect from reducing its effectiveness.

Feature B4: A backup effect setting means (a function of setting information on this premonition backup scenario in the scenario data table by the main control device 101) is provided that sets the backup effect in accordance with the number of games played since the start of the specific effect (continuous effect counter), the progress of the specific effect, or the effect information of each game in the specific effect,
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means executes the preliminary performance based on the setting result of the preliminary performance setting means when the specified condition is met during the execution of the specific performance.

In the above configuration, a backup effect is set separately from the specific effect, corresponding to the number of games played since the specific effect began, the progress of the specific effect, or the effect information for each game in the specific effect. With this configuration, for example, when executing a backup effect in the second game after the specific effect began, it is easy to identify the backup effect that corresponds to the effect that was supposed to be executed in the second game as the specific effect, making it possible to optimally execute a backup effect that corresponds to the effect for each game in the specific effect.

Feature B5: A backup effect setting means (a function of setting information of the premonition backup scenario in a scenario data table by the main control device 101) that performs setting processing of the backup effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means is provided,
the auxiliary performance execution means executes the auxiliary performance based on a setting result of the auxiliary performance setting means when the predetermined condition is met during execution of the specific performance,
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the preliminary performance setting means is equipped with a means for executing the setting process of the preliminary performance in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary performance is executed (a function for setting information on the premonition preliminary scenario corresponding to the second game or later at the start of one game of the continuous performance).

With the above configuration, the preliminary effect setup process is performed in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed, allowing the preliminary effect to be executed smoothly. This effectively prevents processing slowdowns, even if the control process is under high load when, for example, a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect.

Note that with the configuration of Feature B2, which executes a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the type of specific effect, and the configuration of Feature B3, which executes a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order, the preliminary effect to be executed changes depending on the timing of the preliminary effect execution. This means that it is necessary to select a preliminary effect with content appropriate for each situation, which raises concerns about increased processing load and the risk of processing slowdowns. By applying this feature to these configurations, it becomes possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B5, wherein the preliminary effect setting means performs the preliminary effect setting process in a game in which the specific effect setting means performs the specific effect setting process.

With the above configuration, the preliminary effects are set according to the settings of the specific effects, so that the preliminary effects can be executed smoothly when they are executed in the second or subsequent games of the specific effects. Furthermore, when the preliminary effects are executed in the starting game (first game) of the specific effects, they can also be executed according to the settings.

Feature B7. A gaming machine described in any of Features B1 to B6, wherein the preliminary effect execution means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is met (a function for executing processing for executing consecutive effects by the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment).

In the above configuration, preliminary effects are executed in games where a predetermined condition is met, so each time the waiting period is extended, that extension is filled with preliminary effects. This makes it possible to execute preliminary effects at convenient breaks in the specific effect. This prevents the flow of the specific effect from being disrupted by executing preliminary effects at incomplete times.

Feature B8. A gaming machine described in any of Features B1 to B7, wherein the preliminary effect execution means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game during the standby period after the game in which the predetermined condition is met (a function for executing processing for executing consecutive effects by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in games where a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being executed, the continuation of the specific effect takes priority, and the preliminary effect is executed later. This prevents the preliminary effect from being executed at an incomplete stage, interrupting the progress of the specific effect.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8 is characterized in that the preliminary effect execution means includes a determining means (a function that executes preliminary effect counter increment processing by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment) that determines the number of games for which the waiting period has been extended by the specifying means, and a means (a function that executes preliminary effect processing by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment) that executes the preliminary effect for the number of games determined by the determining means in games that occur after the game in which the predetermined condition is met and that are within the waiting period.

For example, if a predetermined condition is met multiple times, there is a risk that the progress of the specific effect will be frequently interrupted by the execution of a preliminary effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the extension of the standby effect that occurs during the specific effect is identified, and preliminary effects of a length corresponding to that extension are executed all at once. This minimizes the interruption of the specific effect due to preliminary effects, and effectively prevents the player from understanding the development of the effect.

Feature B10. The preliminary effect execution means
a first means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is met;
a second means for executing the preliminary effect in a game during the waiting period after the game in which the predetermined condition is established;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B8, characterized in that if the situation when the specified condition is met is a first situation, the first means executes the preliminary performance, and if the situation when the specified condition is met is a second situation different from the first situation, the second means executes the preliminary performance.

In the above configuration, whether the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is met, or whether the preliminary effect is executed after the game in which the predetermined condition is met, can be switched depending on the situation at each time. For example, if the switch is made depending on the progress of the specific effect when the predetermined condition is met, it is possible to execute the preliminary effect if the timing is a good break in the effect, or to continue the specific effect and postpone the preliminary effect if the timing is not a good break. It is also possible to configure the switch to be made depending on the type of specific effect, or the number of games played since the start of the specific effect.

Feature B11. The gaming machine described in Feature B10, wherein the preliminary effect execution means executes the preliminary effect using the first means when the effect executed as the specific effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is met is a first effect, and executes the preliminary effect using the second means when the effect executed as the specific effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is met is a second effect different from the first effect.

With this configuration, the above switching can be performed depending on the progress of the specific effect. This allows you to choose between immediately executing the preliminary effect or waiting until a good point in the effect before executing the preliminary effect, making it possible to effectively prevent the preliminary effect from reducing the effectiveness of the specific effect.

Feature B12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B11, wherein the preliminary effects for one game have a smaller data capacity than the effects for one game of the specific effects.

With the above configuration, the data for the backup effects is kept small, making it possible to conserve storage capacity in the storage means that stores the effect data. Backup effects are used as backups in case the standby period is extended and are not generally executed. By keeping the data for such effects small, it is possible to prevent the storage area for the data for the actual specific effect and the data for other effects from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, by reducing the data capacity of the backup effects, they can be read out in a short time, which is preferable given the nature of backup effects, which are suddenly executed when certain conditions are met during the execution of a specific effect.

Feature B13: A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) that sets a second specific effect to be executed over multiple games when a predetermined condition (winning the execution lottery of a pseudo-omen) is met in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means;
A second specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means is provided with a means for not executing the preliminary performance if the specified condition is met during the execution of the second specific performance.

To avoid immediately determining whether a specific result has been won at the time the specific effect is executed, a function to execute a specific effect (second specific effect) that does not require the specific result to be won may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period, and if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period, this configuration does not execute the backup effect. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of setting up and executing backup effects, and reduce the load on the control process.

Feature B14: A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific win notification process by the display control device 81) that sets a second specific effect to be executed over multiple games when a predetermined condition (winning the execution lottery of a pseudo-omen) is met in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means;
A second specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the preliminary performance execution means is provided with a means for executing the preliminary performance when the specified condition is met during the execution of the second specific performance.

To avoid immediately determining whether a specific result has been won at the time the specific effect is executed, a function to execute a specific effect (second specific effect) that does not require the specific result to be won may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period, but this configuration is configured to execute a preliminary effect even if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period. This prevents the presence or absence of a preliminary effect from revealing whether a specific result has been won in advance, making it possible to maintain the player's anticipation for the outcome of the specific effect for a long time.

Feature B15. A first device (main control device 101),
a second device (display control device 81) electrically connected to the first device and operating based on a signal from the first device;
Equipped with
The first device is
The device includes at least the special determination means, the standby period setting means, the special state transition means, and the identification means,
an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games to be played by the main control device 101) for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of a game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means;
The specifying means prevents the update means from updating the remaining number of games when the predetermined condition is met,
the second device includes the specific effect setting means, the specific effect execution means, and the backup effect execution means;
The first device is provided with an output means (a function of executing a command output process by the main control device 101) for outputting a first signal (premonition game number update command, CZ game number update command) corresponding to the update of the remaining game number by the update means, or a second signal (premonition game number non-update command, CZ game number non-update command) corresponding to the update of the remaining game number not being executed by the update means,
The second device is provided with a grasping means (a function of executing a process for executing a continuous effect by the display control device 81) for grasping that the update of the remaining number of games will not be executed based on the fact that the first signal is not output by the output means or the second signal is output,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the preliminary effect execution means executes the preliminary effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

The above configuration includes a first device and a second device, with the first device acting as a higher-level device. The second device is responsible for controlling game effects, reducing the processing load on the first device. However, because the number of games remaining during the waiting period is managed by the first device, there is a possibility that the first and second devices may not recognize the number of games remaining, raising concerns that preliminary effects may not be properly executed in response to an extended waiting period. In this regard, the present configuration is configured to output a first signal indicating that the number of games remaining during the waiting period has been updated or a second signal indicating that the number of games remaining during the waiting period has not been updated from the first device to the second device. In this case, if a predetermined condition is met and the number of games remaining during the waiting period has not been updated, either the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. Therefore, the second device can determine whether the number of games remaining during the waiting period has been updated on the first device by checking whether the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. This prevents discrepancies in the recognition of the number of remaining games, and makes it possible to appropriately execute preliminary effects in response to an extended waiting period, even in a configuration in which processing is shared between the first and second devices.

This feature may further include a configuration in which "at least one of the first signal and the second signal includes information on the number of games remaining, or the output means includes means for outputting a third signal including information on the number of games remaining." With this configuration, even if a discrepancy occurs, it is possible to correct the discrepancy in the second device based on the first signal, the second signal, or the third signal.

Feature B16: When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101) is provided that updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period based on the start of a game with the number of bets set to the first number (3),
The specifying means prevents the update means from updating the remaining number of games when the predetermined condition is met,
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B15, characterized in that the specified condition is that the game starts with the number of bets set to a second number (2) different from the first number.

In this configuration, the waiting period may or may not be extended depending on the number of bets placed when playing a game. For example, when a player is inserting gaming media for maintenance, it is common for them to accidentally start the game by inserting a second number of gaming media, even though they intended to start the game by inserting a first number of gaming media. In this case, it is possible to alert the player and urge them not to start the game with the second number, but this could distract the player and make it difficult for them to concentrate on the special effects. In this regard, in this configuration, one of the above features B1 to B15 is applied to such an extension of the waiting period based on the player's operation, and the gaming machine takes action. This allows for player operation errors (mistakes in the number of bets), allowing the player to enjoy the special effects without worrying about the number of bets.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A18, Features B1 to B16, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E18, Features F1 to F12, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H16, and Features I1 to I13, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination with each other to each of the above Features B1 to B16. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which symbols (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the symbols is stopped when a stop condition is met;
a specific effect execution means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing, specific role notification processing, and continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) for causing a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed by a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) when a first trigger (winning the pseudo-omen execution lottery in the first and second embodiments, winning the CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, or AT mode game number addition lottery in the third to fifth embodiments) is established, and when a second trigger different from the first trigger (winning the CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, or AT mode game number addition lottery in the first and second embodiments, winning the pseudo-omen execution lottery in the third to fifth embodiments) is established;
Equipped with
the specific effect is executed over a period of time during which a game is played multiple times, in which variable display of the patterns is started in the multiple variable display areas and then variable display of the patterns is stopped in the multiple variable display areas;
The specific effect execution means
a continuation determination means (a function for executing bonus effect setting processing by the display control device 81 according to the first and second embodiments, and a function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the third to fifth embodiments) for determining whether or not to continue the specific effect being executed when a predetermined condition (when a transition to the second BB state occurs in the first and second embodiments, when a game is started with the number of bets set to 2 in the third to fifth embodiments) is met during the execution of the specific effect;
a first means for continuing the specific effect being executed when the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect (a function for continuing the continuous effect when a transition is made to a second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for a pseudo precursor in the first and second embodiments, and a function for continuing the continuous effect when a two-bet game is started during the execution of the continuous effect for a real precursor in the third to fifth embodiments);
a second means for halting or interrupting the specific effect being executed when the determination result of the continuation determination means corresponds to not continuing the specific effect (a function for halting the continuous effect when a transition to a second BB state occurs during execution of the continuous effect for a real precursor in the first and second embodiments, and a function for halting the continuous effect when a two-bet game is started during execution of the continuous effect for a pseudo precursor in the third to fifth embodiments);
Equipped with
The continuation determination means is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of step S2701 by the display control device 81 in the first and second embodiments, and a function of executing the processing of step S3202 by the display control device 81 in the third to fifth embodiments) for determining to continue the specific effect if the specific effect being executed is executed based on the fulfillment of the first trigger, and for determining not to continue the specific effect if the specific effect being executed is executed based on the fulfillment of the second trigger.

In the above configuration, a special effect is executed over multiple games when the first trigger is realized and when the second trigger is realized. If a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the special effect, the special effect will continue if it is based on the first trigger, or will be stopped or interrupted if it is based on the second trigger. Therefore, depending on whether the special effect continues when the predetermined condition is realized, the player can determine whether the first trigger or the second trigger was realized. This provides a new gaming experience in which players can enjoy not only the development of the special effect, but also whether the special effect will continue, making the game more entertaining.

Feature C2. A special determination means (a function that executes AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101) that executes a special determination of whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination trigger (winning the trigger role of the transition lottery);
After the result of the special judgment becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, if a predetermined transition condition (the number of remaining games in the premonition mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0, or an AT mode transition trigger role is won) is met, a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
Equipped with
The first trigger is the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (winning the execution lottery of the pseudo-premonition) in a situation where the specific result is not won,
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that the second trigger is that the judgment result of the special judgment becomes the specific result or a predetermined execution condition based on the specific result (winning the execution lottery for the continuous performance for this premonition, which is carried out based on winning the CZ mode, AT mode, or AT mode game number addition lottery).

In the above configuration, when the result of a special judgment based on the fulfillment of a predetermined trigger becomes a specific result, the game state transitions to a special state or becomes a state that can transition to a special state (a state that transitions when a transition condition is fulfilled). If a specified condition is fulfilled during a specific effect triggered by the special judgment resulting in a specific result or the fulfillment of a specified execution condition based on the specific result (second trigger), the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted. However, if a specified condition is fulfilled during a specific effect triggered by a trigger (first trigger) that is not based on winning a specific result, the specific effect continues as is. Therefore, if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted, the player can tell that the specific result has been won, and if the specific effect continues, the player can tell that the player has not won. This makes it possible to provide a game where the player can know whether they have won or lost by whether the specific effect continues, without having to wait for the conclusion of the specific effect.

Feature C3: A waiting period setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and a second game number management process (a process of setting the CZ counter)) that can set a waiting period (a premonition mode, a CZ mode) so that, when the determination result of the special determination becomes the specific result, at least one of a transition to the special state and a specific notification corresponding to winning the specific result is waited for over a plurality of games;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games to be played by the main control device 101) updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of the game;
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning an AT mode transition trigger role) is established after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a special game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
Equipped with
a specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the update means does not update the number of remaining games over multiple games when a predetermined event (the establishment of a second BB winning) occurs;
A gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that the predetermined condition is the occurrence of the predetermined event or a transition to the specific state.

In the above configuration, when the special determination result is a specific result, a waiting period is set, and the game is not notified of a win or transition to a special state until the waiting period has elapsed. This ensures a presentation period between the winning of a specific result and the transition to the winning notification or special information, allowing the game to be executed during that period. Furthermore, in this configuration, if a predetermined event occurs, the game transitions to a specific state in which the number of games remaining in the waiting period is not updated over multiple games. Therefore, if the game transitions to a specific state during the execution of a specific presentation based on a winning result, the end of the waiting period will be significantly delayed. In this case, it would be possible to extend the specific presentation by the length of the specific state, but the execution period of the specific state itself would be long, which would give the player a drawn-out impression, which is undesirable. It would also be possible to fill the gap with a presentation separate from the specific presentation, but this would require the creation of a presentation, which could increase the burden on the gaming machine design. In this regard, in the present configuration, if the game transitions to a specific state during the execution of a specific presentation based on a winning result, the specific presentation is stopped or interrupted, eliminating the need to consider the delay in the waiting period due to the transition to the specific state. On the other hand, special effects that are not based on winning a specific result are not affected by the waiting period, so if a transition to a specific state occurs during that time, there is no problem with continuing the special effect. In other words, this configuration provides a game where you can know whether you've won or lost by whether the special effect continues, and is also a preferable aspect in relation to the waiting period.

Feature C4. A gaming machine as described in Feature C3, further comprising third means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2201, S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212 by the display control device 81 in the first and second embodiments) for executing the specific effect during the remaining waiting period after the specific state ends if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the second means.

In the above configuration, the special effect is executed after the special state ends, so even if the special effect is canceled or interrupted, the player can be properly notified of the win. This prevents the transition to the special state from occurring when it is unclear whether or not the special result has been won. Furthermore, in the above case, the special effect is executed during the remaining waiting period after the special state ends, making it possible to appropriately synchronize the waiting period and the special effect.

Feature C5. The second means interrupts the specific effect being executed when the determination result of the continuation determination means corresponds to not continuing the specific effect;
The gaming machine described in Feature C4 is characterized in that the third means is provided with a means for resuming the continuation of the interrupted specific effect after the specific state has ended when the specific effect has been interrupted by the second means.

With the above configuration, the interrupted special effect resumes after the special state ends, making it possible to notify the player of a win during the restarted special effect. Furthermore, because the special effect is prevented from ending halfway through, it is possible to show the player the special effect to the end, even in cases where the special effect is rare and is performed infrequently, such as premium effects.

Feature C6. The second means, when the determination result of the continuation determination means corresponds to not continuing the specific effect, stops the specific effect being executed;
The gaming machine described in Feature C4 or Feature C5 is characterized in that the third means is equipped with a means for executing a new specific effect according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state has ended when the specific effect has been canceled by the second means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2201, S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212 by the display control device 81 in the first and second embodiments).

In the above configuration, if the special effect is stopped by the second means, the special effect is executed again after the special state ends, allowing a win notification to be made during that special effect. At that time, a new special effect is executed according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the special state ends, making it possible to optimally synchronize the new special effect with the waiting period.

Feature C7: The specific effect execution means includes third means for executing the specific effect after the execution of the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the second means;
A gaming machine described in any of features C3 to C6, characterized in that the third means is equipped with a special effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4001 to S4008 by the display control device 81 in the fifth embodiment) that starts the special effect before the end of the special state and continues to execute it after the end of the special state.

Depending on the timing of the transition to the specific state, there may be a small number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends. In this case, the insufficient number of games may make it difficult to execute the specific effect. While it is possible to create a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, there are concerns that this would increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with creating the dedicated effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific effect begins before the specific state ends, so it is possible to ensure the number of games required to execute the specific effect even when the number of games remaining in the waiting period is small. This makes it possible to execute the specific effect after it has been canceled or interrupted, while effectively preventing the inability to execute the specific effect properly due to an insufficient number of games, or the increased processing load and design burden associated with the dedicated effect.

Feature C8. A gaming machine as described in Feature C7, wherein the third means includes means (a function for executing the processing of step S4001 by the display control device 81) for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state if the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined number.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start a special state before the end of the special state is switched depending on the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the special state. This effectively prevents the special effect from starting early when there are many games remaining in the waiting period, which can unnecessarily lengthen the special effect and give the player a feeling of dragging on.

In addition, this feature may further include the following configuration: "If the number of games remaining in the waiting period ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means is greater than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the specific state ends."

Feature C9. Special determination means (a function that executes AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101) that executes a special determination of whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination trigger;
After the result of the special judgment becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, if a predetermined transition condition (the number of remaining games in the premonition mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0, or an AT mode transition trigger role is won) is met, a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
Equipped with
The first trigger is that the judgment result of the special judgment becomes the specific result or that a predetermined execution condition based on the specific result (winning the lottery to execute the continuous performance for this premonition, which is carried out based on winning the lottery to add the number of games in the CZ mode, AT mode, or AT mode) is established.
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that the second trigger is the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition (winning the pseudo-premonition execution lottery) in a situation where the specific result is not won.

In the above configuration, when a special determination based on the fulfillment of a predetermined trigger results in a specific result, the game state transitions to a special state or enters a state where transition is possible (a state where transition is possible when a transition condition is fulfilled). If a predetermined condition is fulfilled during a specific effect triggered by the special determination resulting in a specific result or the fulfillment of a predetermined execution condition based on the specific result (first trigger), the specific effect continues. However, if a predetermined condition is fulfilled during a specific effect triggered by a trigger not based on winning a specific result (second trigger), the currently executing specific effect is stopped or interrupted. Therefore, by continuing the specific effect when a predetermined condition is fulfilled, the player can determine that they have won a specific result. This makes it possible to provide a game in which the player can know whether they have won or lost by whether the specific effect continues, without having to wait for the end of the specific effect. Furthermore, knowing whether they have won in advance makes it possible to enjoy watching the remaining specific effects while feeling relieved and immersed in a sense of superiority.

Feature C10. The gaming machine described in Feature C9, wherein the predetermined condition is not met when the game is started with the number of bets set to a first number (3), and is met when the game is started with the number of bets set to a second number (2) different from the first number.

The above configuration allows predetermined conditions to be met with the simple operation of changing the number of bets, making it a desirable aspect of providing a game in which the winner can be determined by whether or not a specific effect continues.

Feature C11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C10, wherein the predetermined condition can be met based on the player's operation.

The above configuration allows the player to fulfill the predetermined conditions at their will. This allows the player to fulfill the predetermined conditions at the timing they wish, making it a desirable aspect of providing a game in which the player can know whether they have won or lost based on whether the specific effects continue. Furthermore, because the player can choose whether or not to fulfill the predetermined conditions, this configuration is also convenient for players who do not want to know in advance whether they have won or lost.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A18, Features B1 to B16, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E18, Features F1 to F12, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H16, and Features I1 to I13, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination with each other to each of the above Features C1 to C11. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) in which symbols (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the symbols is stopped when a stop condition is met;
specific effect setting means (a function for executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) for setting a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a period in which a specific opportunity (winning the CZ mode lottery, the AT mode lottery, or the AT mode game number addition lottery in the first to fifth embodiments, or winning the continuous effect execution lottery in a situation in which the CZ mode lottery, the AT mode lottery, or the AT mode game number addition lottery has been won) is established, the variable display of the patterns is started in the multiple variable display areas, and the specific effect (continuous effect) is executed over a period in which a game in which the variable display of the patterns is stopped in the multiple variable display areas is played multiple times;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that causes the specific effect to be executed by a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a first game (a three-bet game) corresponding to the fulfillment of a first condition (a game being started with three bets), and to execute a second game (a bonus game in a second BB state) corresponding to the fulfillment of a second condition (a second BB win in a two-bet game) different from the first condition,
The specific effect setting means comprises a first means for setting the specific effect to be executed when the specific opportunity is established in a situation where a game of the first condition is played (a function for executing the processing of steps S601 and S602 by the main control device 101, an AT lottery process, an AT addition process, and an indication mode setting process (a function for executing the AT lottery process in the case of a 3-bet game, and a function for setting an indication start command when the AT mode, CZ mode, or AT mode game number addition is won), and a function for executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81 (a function for executing a continuous effect setting process when an indication start command is received, and a function for executing a specific role announcement process by the display control device 81));
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second means for stopping or interrupting the specific effect being executed when the second condition is established after the specific effect is set by the first means and the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during the execution of the specific effect set by the first means (a function for stopping the consecutive effects for this premonition when a transition to a second BB state occurs during the execution of the consecutive effects for this premonition in the first to fifth embodiments).

In the above configuration, when a specific trigger is achieved, a specific effect is executed across multiple games. If a specific effect is executed based on a specific trigger that is achieved while a game based on a first condition is being played, and a second game corresponding to the realization of a second condition is played during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect will be stopped or interrupted. For example, if a configuration in which a specific effect continues to be executed during a second game is adopted, there is a concern that players may become confused because they cannot tell whether a game based on the first condition or a game based on the second condition is being played, or they may mistakenly believe that a game based on the first condition is being played. This configuration effectively prevents such player confusion and makes the game easier to play.

Feature D2. A gaming machine as described in Feature D1, characterized in that it is equipped with means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the second game and different from the specific effect in the second game after the specific effect set by the first means is stopped or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during the execution of the specific effect set by the first means (a function for executing a bonus effect during the transition period of the second BB state when the second BB state is entered during the execution of the consecutive effects for this precursor in the first and second embodiments).

In the above configuration, if a second game is played while a specific effect is being played based on a specific trigger achieved in a game that meets the first condition, a predetermined effect corresponding to the second game is played instead of the specific effect. This makes it clear that it is the second game, making it possible to more effectively prevent player confusion.

Feature D3. A special determination means (a function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing in the case of a 3-bet game) is provided that executes a special determination of whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional game number in AT mode) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the first condition,
The gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that the specific trigger is a specific result (winning CZ mode, AT mode, or additional game number in AT mode) corresponding to causing the special state, or a winning state is achieved in a predetermined lottery process (lottery for executing continuous effects) when the result of the special judgment is the specific result.

In the above configuration, if a special effect based on a special trigger established in a game of the first condition is executed based on winning a special result or winning a predetermined lottery process executed based on that winning, the special effect will be stopped or interrupted when the second game is played during its execution. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not they have won the special result based on whether or not the special effect is stopped or interrupted when the second game is played. This not only allows them to know whether or not they have won based on the outcome of the special effect, but also provides a fun way to determine whether or not they have won by playing the second game in the middle of the special effect.

Feature D4: Even if the result of the special determination is the specific result, transition to the special state is not possible at least during the execution period of the second game,
The gaming machine described in feature D3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a third means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by a display control device 81 in the fourth embodiment) for executing a predetermined effect (a continuous effect for a pseudo-premonition) in which, when the specific effect set by the first means is stopped or interrupted by the second means based on the second game being executed while the specific effect is being executed, a predetermined notification (a defeat effect, a success/failure effect) corresponding to the specific result not being a winning result is made in the second game after the cancellation or interruption.

In the above configuration, if a specific result is won, a specific effect is executed to notify the player of the win. However, because transition to the special state is not possible while the second game is being played, if the second game is played while the specific effect is being played, the transition to the special state is delayed by at least the duration of the second game. This results in the inconvenience of the player not transitioning to the special state even though a win is notified during the specific effect. In this regard, in the second game started during the execution of the specific effect, a specific effect is executed to notify the player of a loss in the specific result. In other words, the effect mode is changed to notify the player of a loss instead of a win, so no inconsistency occurs in the effect even if there is a period of time after the effect ends without the player transitioning to the special state. This avoids the above inconvenience and effectively prevents a decline in player confidence in the effect.

Feature D5. A gaming machine as described in Feature D4, wherein the predetermined effect is executed as a continuation of the specific effect that was stopped or interrupted by the second means.

In the above configuration, the predetermined effect is executed as a continuation of the specific effect that was stopped or interrupted, making it difficult for the player to understand that the effect has switched to a predetermined notification (miss notification) in the middle of the specific effect. This makes it possible to more effectively ensure consistency with the period after the effect ends when there is no transition to the special state.

Feature D6: A second specific effect setting means (a function for executing a specific win notification process by the display control device 81) that sets a second specific effect (a continuous effect for a pseudo-premonition) to be performed over multiple games when a predetermined specific condition (winning the execution lottery for a pseudo-premonition) is met in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state;
A second specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that causes the second specific effect to be executed by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature D4 or feature D5, characterized in that the third means is provided with a means for executing a part of the second specific effect as the specified notification or the specified effect.

In the above configuration, a second specific effect is executed to notify a loss when the specific result is not a winning state. Then, when the predetermined effect is executed when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, a portion of the second specific effect is reused as the predetermined notification or predetermined effect. This allows for a seamless connection between the specific effect before the cancellation or interruption and the predetermined effect after the cancellation or interruption, making it difficult to notice that the effect has switched to a loss notification effect midway through the specific effect. This more effectively ensures consistency with the period of time after the effect ends when there is no transition to a special state. Furthermore, because a portion of the second specific effect is reused, there is no need to provide a dedicated effect as the predetermined effect. This reduces the design burden associated with creating dedicated effects and also saves on the capacity of the storage means that stores effect data.

Feature D7: The specific effect setting means includes a game number setting means for setting the number of games to be played of the specific effect,
a determining means for determining the number of remaining games of the specific effect when the specific effect set by the first means is stopped or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during the execution of the specific effect,
A gaming machine described in any of features D4 to D6, characterized in that the third means does not execute the specified effect if the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is less than or equal to a specified number of games.

When a specific effect has progressed to a certain extent, there are cases where a player has generally determined that they have won. If such a player switches to a predetermined effect to notify them of a loss when they are almost certain that they have won, there is a concern that this could provoke resentment among the player and reduce their interest in the specific effect. In this regard, with this configuration, when a specific effect is stopped or interrupted, the number of games remaining is determined as the progress of the specific effect, and if the determined number of remaining games is less than a predetermined number, the predetermined effect is not executed. In other words, rather than executing the predetermined effect uniformly, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is determined depending on the number of games remaining, which prevents a loss notification from being executed when the player is almost certain that they have won. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a decrease in interest in the specific effect when switching to a predetermined effect.

Feature D8. The specific effects include at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect;
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the second means is provided with means for stopping or suspending the first specific effect when the second game is executed while the first specific effect is being executed, and for continuing the second specific effect even after the start of the second game when the second game is executed while the second specific effect is being executed.

In the above configuration, if a second game is played while a special effect is being executed, whether the special effect is stopped or interrupted, or whether it continues, is determined by the type of special effect. Therefore, for example, if a special effect that is executed infrequently and is of high value to players, such as a premium effect, is being executed, it is possible to continue the special effect even when the second game is being played.

Note that this feature may further include the following configuration: "The second specific effect is executed less frequently than the first specific effect" or "The second specific effect is executed for a longer number of games than the first specific effect."

Feature D9. When the specific trigger is established, a notification execution means is provided that can execute a specific notification different from the specific effect (such as a notification indicating that a trigger for executing a continuous effect has been established or that a continuous effect is being executed),
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D8, characterized in that when the second game is executed while the specific notification and the specific effect are being executed, the second means is configured to be able to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed while continuing the specific notification.

In the above configuration, when a specific trigger is achieved, a specific notification is executed separately from the specific effect. If a second game is played while the specific notification and the specific effect are being executed, the specific effect will be stopped or interrupted, while the specific notification will continue. Therefore, even if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted, the player can know that they have actually won the specific result by seeing the specific notification, which can create a sense of anticipation for playing after the cancellation or interruption.

In this feature, "a specific notification different from the specific effect" can also be expressed as "a specific notification that is different from the specific effect and corresponds to the occurrence of the specific trigger" or "a specific notification that is different from the specific effect and allows the player to recognize or infer the occurrence of the specific trigger."

Feature D10. The specific notification is made by display,
A gaming machine as described in feature D9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for continuing the specific notification at the same display position as the display position of the specific notification immediately before the specific presentation is stopped or interrupted by the second means.

In the above configuration, the display position of the specific notification does not change before or after the specific effect is stopped or interrupted. This makes it easier for players to recognize the role of the specific notification (which is essentially a win notification), and also prevents players from becoming confused when they lose track of the specific notification after the effect is stopped or interrupted.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features D1 to D10: features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H16, and features I1 to I13, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A special determination means (a function that executes AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101) that executes a special determination of whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination trigger (winning the trigger role of the transition lottery);
a specific effect setting means (a function of setting information of this premonition scenario in a scenario data table by a display control device 81) for setting a specific effect (continuous effect) for a specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to winning the specific result so that it is executed over multiple games when the result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state;
A specific effect execution means (a function for executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the specific effect on a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information on the present premonition scenario set in the scenario data table);
When a predetermined condition (a BB win is achieved, or a game is started with a bet of 2) is achieved at least during the execution of the specific effect, a specific means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101 (in the case of a 2-bet game, the premonition counter and the CZ counter are not updated)) for delaying the transition game to the special state or the game that allows the transition to the special state;
a change means for changing the presentation mode of the specific presentation so that a predetermined notification (defeat presentation, success/failure presentation, draw presentation) different from the specific presentation is made when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific presentation (a function for executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by the display control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment; a function for making a notification corresponding to a loss when a two-bet game is played, and then changing the presentation mode so that a revival presentation is made);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined trigger is met, a special determination is made to determine whether a special state advantageous to the player will be created. If the result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the creation of a special state, a specific effect is executed over multiple games to issue a specific notification corresponding to the winning of the specific result. Furthermore, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect, the transition game to the special state or the game that allows transition to the special state is delayed. However, because the specific effect is set based on the state before the transition game, etc. is delayed, a delay in the transition game, etc., can result in the special state not transitioning for a long time even though a specific notification (winning notification) is issued during the specific effect. This can lead to concerns that the player's trust in the effect will be reduced, making it impossible to continue the special effect. In this regard, in the present configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect, the presentation mode of the specific effect is changed so that a specific notification different from the specific notification is issued. This effectively prevents presentation inconsistencies from occurring even when a period of time continues without transitioning to the special state after the effect ends. This means that even if the transition game to a special state is delayed during a specific effect, it will be possible to continue the specific effect.

Note that this feature may further include the following configuration: "The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect so that at least the specific notification is executed before transition to the special state."

Furthermore, this feature may further include the following prerequisite configuration: "A gaming machine having a plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which pictures (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the pictures is stopped when a stop condition is met, and in which the variable display of the pictures is started in a plurality of the variable display areas and stopped in a plurality of the variable display areas, counting as one game."

Feature E2. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1, wherein the predetermined notification is a notification corresponding to a non-winning result (a loss effect, a success/failure effect).

In the above configuration, the special effect continues by issuing a notification corresponding to a non-win (a loss notification) instead of a special notification (a win notification), making the player believe they have lost. This maintains consistency with the effect even if there is a period of time after the effect ends without transitioning to the special state, and makes it possible to continue the special effect even if there is a delay in transitioning to the special state while the special effect is being executed.

Feature E3. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1 or Feature E2, wherein the change means changes the presentation mode of the specific effect so that the specific notification is made if the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect and before the specific notification or a specific notification (such as a reach sign) that the player can recognize or infer has occurred that the specific result has been achieved.

In this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met before a specific notification is executed in a specific effect, the presentation mode of the specific effect is changed so that the specific notification is executed. For example, if a specific notification is executed after a specific notification is executed in a specific effect, there is a concern that a contradiction will arise within the specific effect, giving the player an unnatural impression. With this configuration, the presentation mode is changed to a degree that does not create such a contradiction, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects of feature E1 or feature E2 while suppressing the occurrence of contradictions within the specific effect.

Feature E4. A gaming machine as described in Feature E3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for halting or interrupting the specific effect being executed if the predetermined condition is met during execution of the specific effect and the specific notification is issued or after the specific notification is issued.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met after a specific notification is executed, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted, preventing a predetermined notification from being executed after a specific notification is executed and effectively preventing inconsistencies from occurring within the specific effect.

Feature E5: A plurality of types of specific effects (first consecutive effects, second consecutive effects) are provided as the specific effects,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the change means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3303 and S3306 by the display control device 81) for changing the presentation mode of the specific presentation so that the specified notification corresponding to the type of specific presentation set by the specific presentation setting means or being executed by the specific presentation execution means is made.

In the above configuration, the presentation mode of the special effect is changed so that a predetermined notification corresponding to the type of special effect currently being executed is issued. In other words, because the predetermined notification is consistent with the type of special effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the special effect has switched to a notification effect midway through. This prevents players from feeling unnatural, while ensuring consistency with the period after the effect ends when there is no transition to a special state.

Feature E6. A first specific effect setting means as the specific effect setting means;
A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific notification process by the display control device 81) for setting the specific effect for the predetermined notification (continuous effect for the pseudo-premonition) to be executed over multiple games when a predetermined specific condition (winning the execution lottery for the pseudo-premonition) is established in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the change means is provided with a means for changing the presentation mode so that a part of a specific presentation for the specified notification is executed as the specified notification or as a presentation for executing the specified notification.

In the above configuration, a second special effect for notifying a loss is executed when the specific result is not a winning state. When the presentation mode of the special effect is changed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition during the execution of the special effect, a portion of the second special effect is reused. Like the special effect for special notification (winning notification), this second special effect for notifying a loss was originally configured as a special effect. Therefore, by utilizing the second special effect as the changed special effect, it is possible to smoothly connect the pre-change special effect and the changed special effect. This prevents an unnatural impression and makes it difficult for players to notice that the presentation mode of the special effect has changed. This makes it easier for players to believe they have lost and more effectively ensures consistency with the period of time after the end of the special effect when the special state does not transition to a special state. Moreover, because a portion of the second special effect is reused, there is no need to provide a dedicated presentation mode for the change. This reduces the design burden associated with creating dedicated presentation modes and also saves on the storage capacity of the presentation data.

Feature E7: A plurality of types of first specific effects (first specific effects for this premonition, second specific effects) are provided as the first specific effects,
As the second specific effect, a plurality of types of the second specific effect (first specific effect for pseudo odds, second specific effect) corresponding to the type of the first specific effect are provided,
The gaming machine described in feature E6 is characterized in that the change means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S3303 by the display control device 81) for changing the presentation mode so that a part of the second specific presentation corresponding to the type of the first specific presentation set by the first specific presentation setting means or being executed by the specific presentation execution means is executed as the specified notification or as a presentation for executing the specified notification.

In the above configuration, when the presentation mode of a specific effect is changed, the presentation mode of the specific effect is changed using part of a second specific effect that corresponds to the type of specific effect currently being executed. This makes it difficult to notice that the specific effect has switched to a miss notification effect midway through, preventing the player from feeling unnatural.

Feature E8. The first specific effect and the second specific effect are configured so that the effect content progresses as the game is executed,
The gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 is characterized in that the change means is provided with a means for changing the presentation mode so that a part of the second specific presentation corresponding to the continuation of the first specific presentation before the change is executed.

In the above configuration, the presentation mode of the specific effect is changed by executing a portion of the second specific effect that corresponds to the continuation of the first specific effect before the change, making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the pre-change and post-change boundaries. This makes it difficult for players to notice that the specific effect has switched to a notification effect midway through, preventing an unnatural impression from being given to the player.

Feature E9: The specific effect setting means includes a game number setting means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) that sets the number of games to be played of the specific effect,
a means for ascertaining the number of remaining games for the specific effect when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect;
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the change means is provided with a means for preventing the change from being made if the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining game number grasp means for effect is less than a predetermined number of games.

When a special effect has progressed to a certain extent, there are cases where a player has generally determined that they have won. If such a player switches to a loss notification when they are almost certain that they have won, there is a concern that this could provoke resentment among the player and reduce their interest in the special effect. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special effect is stopped or interrupted, the number of games remaining is determined as the progress of the special effect, and if the determined number of remaining games is less than a predetermined number, the change to the predetermined notification is not executed. In other words, rather than uniformly executing a change to the predetermined notification, the above change is selectively made depending on the number of games remaining, thereby preventing a loss notification from being executed when the player is almost certain that they have won.

Feature E10. A gaming machine described in any of Features E1 to E9, wherein the specifying means, when the predetermined condition is met, transitions to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to a second BB state) in which the transition game to the special state or the game in which transition to the special state is possible is delayed over multiple games.

In this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being performed, a transition to a specific state occurs, and the transition to a special state is delayed for a relatively long period of time. When the delay is this long, the delay in transitioning to a special state in response to a specific notification during a specific effect cannot be ignored. By applying any of the configurations of features E1 to E9 above to such situations, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with the transition delay.

Feature E11. A gaming machine according to Feature E10, wherein the specific effect setting means includes resetting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2201, S2215, S2207 and subsequent steps by the display control device 81) that sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be executed after the specific state when the change is executed by the change means.

In the above configuration, if the change means changes the presentation mode of the special effect so that the special notification is not executed, the special effect is executed after the execution of the special effect, and the special notification is made during that execution. This allows the player to be properly notified of a win even if the special notification is canceled due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition during the special effect.

Feature E12. A standby period setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and a second game number management process (a process for setting the CZ counter)) that can set a standby period (a premonition mode, a CZ mode) so that, when the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is waited for over a plurality of games;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games to be played by the main control device 101) updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of the game;
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning a role that triggers a transition to the AT mode) is established after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a special state transition means (a function that executes a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to the special state;
Equipped with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed during the standby period when the standby period is set by the standby period setting means,
The specific state prevents the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed over multiple games,
The gaming machine described in feature E11 is characterized in that the resetting means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be executed during the remaining waiting period after the specific state.

In the above configuration, when a special effect for a special notification is executed after the end of a special state, the special effect is executed within the remaining standby period after the end of the special state. This effectively prevents the special effect after the special state from being executed beyond the standby period, causing the standby period and the special effect to become out of sync.

Feature E13. A gaming machine as described in Feature E11 or E12, wherein the resetting means includes means for setting so that a new specific effect for the specific notification is executed after the specific state.

In the above configuration, if the change means changes the presentation mode of the special effect so that the special notification is not executed, a new special effect for the special notification is executed again after the special state ends. This clearly distinguishes between the special effect that was executed when the specified condition was met (the special effect that was executed at the time of the change) and the special effect after the special state, making it possible to effectively prevent players from confusing the two.

Feature E14. The specific effect setting means includes resetting means for setting, when the change is executed by the change means, that the specific effect for the specific notification is executed after the specific effect whose effect mode has been changed has ended,
A gaming machine described in any of features E10 to E13, characterized in that the resetting means is equipped with a specific presentation means (a function that, in the fifth embodiment, causes the display control device 81 to execute the processing of steps S4001 to S4008) that ensures that the specific presentation for the specific notification is started before the end of the specific state and continues after the end of the specific state.

Depending on the timing of the transition to the specific state, there may be a small number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends. In this case, the insufficient number of games may make it difficult to execute the specific effect. While it is possible to create a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, there are concerns that this would increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with creating the dedicated effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific effect begins before the specific state ends, so it is possible to ensure the number of games required to execute the specific effect even when the number of games remaining in the waiting period is small. This makes it possible to execute the specific effect after it has been canceled or interrupted, while effectively preventing the inability to execute the specific effect properly due to an insufficient number of games, or the increased processing load and design burden associated with the dedicated effect.

In addition, this feature also includes "waiting period setting means (a function for executing a process for setting a premonition mode by the main control unit 101 and a process for managing the second number of games (a process for setting the CZ counter)) that can set a waiting period (omen mode, CZ mode) so that, when the result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is waited for over multiple games; an update means (a function for executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control unit 101) that updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of a game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means; and and special state transition means (a function for executing processing corresponding to winning results by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to the special state when the update result of the stage becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning a role that triggers a transition to AT mode) is met after the update result becomes the predetermined result, wherein the specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed during the waiting period when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, and the specific state prevents the update means from executing the update of the remaining number of games over multiple games.

Feature E15. A standby period setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and a second game number management process (a process for setting the CZ counter)) that can set a standby period (premonition mode, CZ mode) so that, when the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is waited for over a plurality of games;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games to be played by the main control device 101) updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of the game;
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning a role that triggers a transition to the AT mode) is established after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a special state transition means (a function that executes a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to the special state;
Equipped with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed during the standby period when the standby period is set by the standby period setting means,
The specific state prevents the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed over multiple games,
The gaming machine described in feature E14 is characterized in that the specific presentation means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S4001 by the display control device 81) that ensures that the specific presentation for the specific notification is started before the end of the specific state if the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is less than a predetermined number.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start a special state before the end of the special state is switched depending on the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the special state. This effectively prevents the special effect from starting early when there are many games remaining in the waiting period, which can unnecessarily lengthen the special effect and give the player a feeling of dragging on.

In addition, this feature may further include the following configuration: "If the number of games remaining in the waiting period ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means is greater than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the specific state ends."

Feature E16. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1, characterized in that the change means includes means for changing the presentation mode of the specific effect (a function for changing to a revival presentation) so that, if the predetermined condition is met while the specific effect is being executed, a predetermined notification different from the specific notification (a defeat presentation, a success/failure presentation) is played, and then the specific notification is played in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined notification was played.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met while a special effect is being played, a predetermined notification different from the special notification is first played, and the presentation mode of the special effect is changed so that a winning notification is played in the subsequent game. This allows the number of games in which the special effect is played to be increased while avoiding any inconsistencies with the results of the special judgment, and makes it possible to respond to delays in transitioning to the special state.

Feature E17. A gaming machine as described in Feature E16, wherein the specification means delays by one game the transition game to the special state or the game in which transition to the special state is possible in response to one fulfillment of the predetermined condition.

With this configuration, the delay in transitioning to a special state when a specified condition is met is limited to one game. By applying the configuration of feature E16 above (a configuration that changes to a revival effect) to such a delay, it is possible to delay the specific notification to follow the delay in transitioning to the special state.

Feature E18. A standby period setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and a second game number management process (a process for setting the CZ counter)) that can set a standby period (premonition mode, CZ mode) so that, when the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is waited for over a plurality of games;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101) updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period based on the fact that a game is started with the number of bets set to the first number (3);
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning a role that triggers a transition to the AT mode) is established after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a special state transition means (a function that executes a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to the special state;
Equipped with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed during the standby period when the standby period is set by the standby period setting means,
The specifying means prevents the update means from updating the remaining number of games when the predetermined condition is met,
A gaming machine described in feature E16 or feature E17, characterized in that the specified condition is that the game starts with the number of bets set to a second number (2) different from the first number.

In this configuration, the transition to the special state may or may not be delayed depending on the number of bets placed when playing the game. For example, when a player is inserting gaming media for maintenance, they may intend to start the game by inserting the first number of gaming media, but may unintentionally start the game by inserting the second number. In this case, it may be possible to alert the player and urge them not to start the game with the second number, but this may distract the player and make it difficult for them to concentrate on the special effects. In this regard, in this configuration, feature E16 or feature E17 described above is applied to such transition delays based on player operation, and the gaming machine takes action. This allows for player operation errors (mistakes in the number of bets), allowing players to enjoy the special effects without worrying about the number of bets.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features E1 to E18: features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H16, and features I1 to I13, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. When a predetermined specific condition (CZ mode, AT mode, or winning the number of games added in the AT mode) is met, a specific effect setting means (a function of executing the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) that sets a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over multiple games;
A specific effect execution means (a function for executing a process for executing consecutive effects by the display control device 81) that executes the specific effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information on the present premonition scenario set in the scenario data table);
Equipped with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be performed during a specific period (premonition mode, CZ mode) during which the specific effect can be performed,
An update means for updating the number of games remaining for the specific period in accordance with the execution of the game (a function for executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101);
A specific state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) in which the update of the remaining number of games by the update means is not executed when a predetermined condition (a second BB winning) is established during the specific period, and the specific state (a bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the update means is not executed;
Equipped with
The specific effect setting means includes a first means (a function of executing a bonus effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the fifth embodiment) for causing the specific effect to be performed using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first means is equipped with a second means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4001 to S4008 by the display control device 81) that causes the specific effect to be started before the end of the specific state and to be executed across the end of the specific state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met, a specific effect is set to be executed over multiple games. This setting is performed so that the specific effect is executed during a specific period during which it can be executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is met during the specific period, the system transitions to a specific state in which the number of games remaining for the specific period is not updated, and the update of the number of remaining games is suspended. In this configuration, for example, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a specific effect and the system transitions to the specific state, there may be cases in which the specific effect is desired to be executed again after the specific state ends. However, depending on the timing of the transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining for the specific period after the end of the specific state may be small. In this case, there is a risk that the execution of the specific effect may be difficult due to an insufficient number of games. It is also possible to provide a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but there are concerns that this would increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with creating the dedicated effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific effect starts before the end of the specific state, so the number of games for which the specific effect is executed can be greater than the actual number of games remaining. This prevents situations where a specific effect cannot be executed properly due to an insufficient number of games, or where dedicated effects increase the processing load or burden on the design, making it possible to optimally execute consecutive effects using the remaining specific period after a specific state.

Note that this feature may further include the following prerequisite configuration: "A gaming machine having a plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which pictures (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the pictures is stopped when a stop condition is met, and in which the variable display of the pictures is started in a plurality of the variable display areas and stopped in a plurality of the variable display areas, counting as one game."

Feature F2. A gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the second means includes means (a function for executing the processing of step S4001 by the display control device 81) for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state if the number of games remaining in the specific period after the end of the specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined number.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start a specific state before the end of the specific state is switched depending on the number of games remaining in the specific period after the end of the specific state. This effectively prevents the specific effect from starting early when there are many games remaining in the specific period, which can unnecessarily lengthen the specific effect and give the player a feeling of dragging on.

Feature F3. A gaming machine as described in Feature F2, further comprising means for starting the specific effect after the specific state ends if the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining game number grasping means is greater than the predetermined number.

With the above configuration, the special effect is prevented from starting before the end of the special state, even if there are sufficient games remaining for the special period after the end of the special state. This effectively prevents the special effect from being unnecessarily long and giving the player a feeling of dragging on.

Feature F4. The second means is
A start determination means (a function that executes the process of step S4002 by the display control device 81) that determines whether or not the current game is a start game in which the specific effect should be started, by referring to the remaining status of the specific state (number of games remaining in the bonus game, number of coins remaining until the upper limit payout number) or the progress status (number of games played in the bonus game, number of coins paid out since the start of the bonus game);
a means for starting the specific effect when the start determination means determines that it is the start game (a function for executing the processing of steps S4002 to S4008 by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it is provided with:

When starting a special effect before the end of a special state, for example, if the start timing of the special effect is too early, the special effect may end before the remaining special period after the special state has ended. Conversely, if the start timing of the special effect is too late, the special effect may exceed the special period. In this regard, with this configuration, the number of games remaining in the special state is identified or estimated by referring to the remaining status or progress status in each special state, and the start timing of the special effect is determined based on that result. This allows the special effect to be started at an appropriate time in relation to the number of games remaining in the special state, making it possible to optimally implement a special effect that is appropriate for both the number of games remaining in the special state and the number of games remaining in the special period.

Feature F5. The specific state is a bonus game in which an upper limit on the number of game media to be paid out is set,
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the second means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4002 to S4008 by the display control device 81) for starting the specific presentation in the final game of the bonus game.

In a bonus game that ends when the number of gaming media paid out reaches the maximum payout number, the number of games played (the transition period to the bonus state) is not uniquely determined. However, if a winning combination is drawn during the bonus game, and the number of gaming media paid out corresponding to that combination is equal to or greater than the remaining number of payouts up to the maximum payout number, that game can be identified as the final game of the bonus game. In other words, while there is a risk of unreliability in estimating the number of remaining games (two or three games), the final game can be accurately identified. Therefore, if a consecutive effect is configured to start in the final game of the specific state, the specific effect can be executed with one game reliably added to the number of games remaining in the specific period. This not only increases the number of games played for the specific effect, but also makes it possible to optimally synchronize the specific effect with the specific period.

Feature F6. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (winning the transition lottery trigger role), a special judgment is made as to whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player (a function of executing AT lottery processing and AT additional processing by the main control device 101),
the specific condition is that the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state,
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the first means is configured to execute the specific effect for a specific notification (victory effect, successful transformation effect) corresponding to winning the specific result using the remaining specific period after the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, a special effect is executed using the remaining special period after the special state, during which a special notification corresponding to a win in a special result is executed. Therefore, even if, for example, a transition to a special state occurs during the execution of a special effect and the special notification is prevented, it is possible to properly notify the player of a win.

Feature F7: The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be performed during the specific period,
When the specific period has elapsed, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the transition trigger role of the AT mode) is established after the specific period has elapsed, a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
means for terminating the specific effect being executed when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect that was started before the transition to the specific state (a function for executing processing for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81 according to the first, second, fourth, and fifth embodiments);
A gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the game state transitions to the special state if a predetermined transition condition is met after the specific period has elapsed or after the elapse of that period. Under this configuration, if the specific period is extended due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the timing of the execution of the special notification in the special effect will differ from the end of the waiting period. This can lead to the inconvenience of the special effect not transitioning to the special state for a long time despite the special notification informing the player of a win, which could reduce the player's trust in the effect. In this regard, with this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a special effect that started before the transition to the special state, that special effect is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special state from being delayed despite the special notification being issued. In this case, the special notification will not be executed in the special effect that started before the transition to the special state, but the special effect will be executed again using the remaining time after the special state, and the special notification will be executed during that time. Therefore, even if the previous special effect is canceled, the player can be appropriately notified of the win.

Feature F8: The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be performed during the specific period,
When the specific period has elapsed, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the transition trigger role of the AT mode) is established after the specific period has elapsed, a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the special state;
A gaming machine described in feature F6 or feature F7, characterized in that it is equipped with a change means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by a display control device 81 relating to the fourth embodiment) that changes the presentation mode of the specific presentation so that, if the specified condition is met during the execution of the specific presentation, a specified notification (defeat presentation, transformation failure presentation) corresponding to non-winning of the specific result is made.

In the above configuration, the game state transitions to the special state if a predetermined transition condition is met after the specific period has elapsed or after the elapse of the specific period. Under this configuration, if the specific period is extended due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the timing of the execution of the special notification in the special effect and the end of the waiting period will differ. This can lead to the inconvenience of the player not transitioning to the special state for a long time despite the specific notification informing them of a win, raising concerns that this could reduce the player's trust in the effect. In this regard, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a special effect that began before the transition to the special state, the presentation mode of the special effect is changed so that a predetermined notification (loss notification) corresponding to a non-win for the specific result is issued. This can lead the player to believe that they have lost, and effectively prevents the occurrence of presentation inconsistencies even if a period of time continues after the end of the effect without transitioning to the special state. In this case, the special notification will not be executed in the special effect that began before the transition to the special state, but the special effect will be executed again using the remaining time after the special state, and the special notification will be issued during that time. Therefore, even if the presentation mode is changed so that the previous specific presentation is not executed, the player can still be properly notified of the win.

Feature F9. A first specific effect setting means as the specific effect setting means;
A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific notification process by the display control device 81) for setting the specific notification effect (continuous pseudo-premonition effect) to be executed over multiple games when a predetermined condition (winning the execution lottery of the pseudo-premonition) is established in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state;
The gaming machine described in feature F8 is characterized in that the change means changes the presentation mode so that a part of a specific presentation for the specified notification is executed as the specified notification or as a presentation for executing the specified notification.

In the above configuration, a special effect for notifying a loss is executed when a specific result is not won. When the mode of the special effect is changed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition during execution of the special effect, a portion of the special effect for notifying a loss is reused. Like the special effect for specific notifications (win notifications), this special effect for notifying a loss was originally configured as a special effect. Therefore, by utilizing the special effect for notifying a loss as the changed special effect, it is possible to smoothly connect the pre-change special effect and the changed special effect. This prevents an unnatural impression and makes it difficult for players to notice that the mode of the special effect has been changed. This makes it easier for players to believe they have lost and more effectively ensures consistency with the period of time after the effect ends when the special state does not transition to a special state. Furthermore, because a portion of the special effect for notifying a loss is reused, there is no need to provide a dedicated effect for the change. This reduces the design burden associated with creating the dedicated effect and also saves on the storage capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data.

Feature F10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F7 to F9, wherein the second means includes means for executing a new specific effect using the remaining specific period after the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, a new special effect is executed again for the special state that began before the transition to the special state, using the remaining special period after the end of the special state. This clearly distinguishes between the special effect that was executed when the specified condition was met and the special effect that uses the remaining special period after the special state, effectively preventing players from confusing the two.

Feature F11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F10, wherein the specific state is executed over multiple games.

In this configuration, if a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being performed, a transition to a specific state occurs, and the transition to a special state is delayed for a relatively long period of time. When the delay is this long, the delay in transitioning to a special state in response to a specific notification during a specific effect cannot be ignored. By applying any of the configurations of features F1 to F10 above to such situations, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with the transition delay.

Feature F12. Based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the transition lottery trigger role), a special judgment is made as to whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or additional number of games in AT mode) advantageous to the player (a function of executing AT lottery processing and AT additional processing by the main control device 101),
the specific condition is that the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state,
a waiting period setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and a second game number management process (a process of setting the CZ counter)) that can set a waiting period (premonition mode, CZ mode) so that, when the judgment result of the special judgment is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, at least one of a transition to the special state and a specific notification (a winning effect, a successful transformation effect) corresponding to winning the specific result is waited for over a plurality of games;
the specific period is the waiting period,
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F11, characterized in that it is equipped with a special state transition means (a function of executing processing corresponding to winning results by the main control unit 101) that transitions the gaming state to the special state when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the passage of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is met after the update result becomes the predetermined result.

In the above configuration, when the result of a special determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination trigger is a specific result, a waiting period is set during which at least one of a transition to a special state advantageous to the player and a specific notification that the specific result has been won is awaited, and a specific effect is executed in accordance with this waiting period. By applying any of the above features F1 to F11 to this configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect in an optimal manner in relation to the remaining waiting period after the specific state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features F1 to F12: features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H16, and features I1 to I13. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (winning the transition lottery trigger role), a special judgment is made as to whether or not to create a special state (CZ mode, AT mode, or AT mode game number addition) advantageous to the player (a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101);
a waiting period setting means (a function of executing the process of setting the premonition mode by the main control device 101 and the process of managing the second number of games (a process of setting the CZ counter)) that can set a waiting period (premonition mode, CZ mode) so that when the result of the special determination is a specific result that corresponds to causing the special state, at least one of a transition to the special state and a specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to winning the specific result is waited for over multiple games;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an update means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games to be played by the main control device 101) updates the number of games remaining in the waiting period in accordance with the execution of the game;
a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to the special state when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is met after the update result becomes the predetermined result;
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect (continuous effect) that is executed over a plurality of games is started in a predetermined game during the waiting period, and the specific notification is executed in a specific game after the predetermined game in the specific effect setting means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81);
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81) that executes the specific effect on a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information on the present premonition scenario set in the scenario data table);
A specific means for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when at least the first condition (the game starts with the specified number set to 2) or the second condition (the second BB winning occurs) is fulfilled during the execution of the specific effect (a function for executing a game number update process by the main control device 101 (in the case of a 2-bet game, the premonition counter and the CZ counter are not updated during the bonus game));
Equipped with
When the second condition is satisfied, a period during which the update by the update means is not performed is longer than when the first condition is satisfied,
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a first means (a function of executing a process for executing continuous effects by the display control device 81 according to the third and fourth embodiments) for continuing the specific effect that is currently being executed;
When the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a second means (a function of executing a bonus effect setting process by the display control device 81 in the first to fifth embodiments) for halting or interrupting the specific effect being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the result of a special determination based on the fulfillment of a predetermined trigger becomes a specific result, a waiting period is set during which at least one of a transition to a special state advantageous to the player and a specific notification that the specific result has been won is awaited. During this waiting period, a specific effect is executed over multiple games, and the specific notification is made in a specific game during that specific effect. Then, if a predetermined transition condition is met after the waiting period has elapsed or after the lapse of the waiting period, the gaming state transitions to the special state. In other words, after a specific notification is made during the specific effect and the player is notified that they have won, the gaming state transitions to the special state or becomes a state in which a transition is possible (a state in which a transition is made when a transition condition is met).

In this configuration, if the first or second condition is met during at least the execution of a specific effect, the waiting period is extended and the end game of that period is delayed. Meanwhile, because the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, there will be a discrepancy between the timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period. In this case, if the waiting period is extended during the execution of a specific effect, the configuration determines whether to continue the currently executing specific effect or to cancel or suspend it, depending on the length of the extension. Specifically, if the first condition is met during the execution of a specific effect and the waiting period is extended by a short period, the discrepancy between the timing of the execution of the specific notification and the end of the waiting period is deemed to be within the acceptable range, and the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized. Meanwhile, if the second condition is met during the execution of a specific effect and the waiting period is extended by a long period, the discrepancy is deemed to be significant, and the specific effect is canceled or suspended, and the execution of the specific notification is forcibly terminated. This configuration increases the chances of the special effect continuing, while preventing inconsistencies from occurring even if there is a period of time after the effect ends without transitioning to a special state. Therefore, compared to configurations that always continue the special effect, or always stop or interrupt the special effect, it is possible to more appropriately deal with events in which the waiting period is extended while the special effect is being performed.

Note that this feature may further include the following prerequisite configuration: "A gaming machine having a plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which pictures (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the pictures is stopped when a stop condition is met, and in which the variable display of the pictures is started in a plurality of the variable display areas and stopped in a plurality of the variable display areas, counting as one game."

Feature G2: The specifying means includes a specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to a second BB state) in which the update means does not update the number of remaining games over multiple games when the second condition is established,
A gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that it is equipped with a third means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2201, S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212 by a display control device 81) for executing the specific effect during the remaining waiting period after the specific state ends if the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted by the second means.

In the above configuration, if the special effect is stopped or interrupted by the second means, the special effect is re-executed after the special state ends. A winning notification can be made during this re-executed special effect, preventing a transition to the special state when it is unclear whether or not a specific result has been won. Furthermore, in the above case, the special effect is executed during the remaining waiting period after the end of the special state, making it possible to optimally synchronize the waiting period and the special effect.

Feature G3. The gaming machine described in Feature G2, wherein the third means executes the specific effect so that the specific notification is made.

With the above configuration, a specific notification is made during a specific effect after a specific state is reached, so even if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the second means, the player can be appropriately notified of a win.

Feature G4: The specifying means includes specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to a second BB state) in which the update means does not update the number of remaining games over multiple games when the second condition is met,
A third means (a function of executing a bonus effect setting process by a display control device 81 according to a fifth embodiment) for executing the specific effect after the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted by the second means,
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G3, characterized in that the third means is equipped with a special effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4001 to S4008 by the display control device 81 in the fifth embodiment) that starts the special effect before the end of the special state and continues to execute it after the end of the special state.

Depending on the timing of the transition to the specific state, there may be a small number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends. In this case, the insufficient number of games may make it difficult to execute the specific effect. While it is possible to create a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, there are concerns that this would increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with creating the dedicated effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific effect begins before the specific state ends, so it is possible to ensure the number of games required to execute the specific effect even when the number of games remaining in the waiting period is small. This makes it possible to execute the specific effect after it has been canceled or interrupted, while effectively preventing the inability to execute the specific effect properly due to an insufficient number of games, or the increased processing load and design burden associated with the dedicated effect.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to Feature G4, wherein the third means includes means (a function for executing the processing of step S4001 by the display control device 81) for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state if the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined number.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start a special state before the end of the special state is switched depending on the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the special state. This effectively prevents the special effect from starting early when there are many games remaining in the waiting period, which can unnecessarily lengthen the special effect and give the player a feeling of dragging on.

In addition, this feature may further include the following configuration: "If the number of games remaining in the waiting period ascertained by the ascertaining means is greater than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the specific state ends."

Feature G6. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 is characterized in that the first means includes means for continuing the specific effect by making the specific notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific notification was made, after making a predetermined notification (loss effect, success/failure effect) corresponding to a non-winning specific result.

In the above configuration, when the special effect is continued by the first means, a predetermined notification (miss notification) is first made, and then the presentation mode of the special effect is changed so that a win notification is made in the subsequent game. This ultimately makes it possible to make a special notification, avoiding any inconsistencies with the results of the special judgment, while optimally increasing the number of games in which the special effect is played, and making it possible to respond to delays in transitioning to the special state.

Feature G7. A gaming machine described in any of Features G1 to G6, wherein the specification means sets the period during which the remaining number of games is not updated to one game in response to the first condition being met once.

With this configuration, the delay in transitioning to the special state when the first condition is met is limited to one game, so by continuing the special effect in the event of such a delay, it is possible to suitably expand the opportunities for the special effect to continue. Furthermore, by applying this feature to the configuration of feature G6 above (the configuration that changes to a revival effect), it is possible to delay the special notification to follow the delay in transitioning to the special state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the features G1 to G7 above: features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H16, and features I1 to I13. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) in which pictures (designs) are variably displayed,
a first operating means (start lever 41) that, when operated, starts variable display of pictures in each of the variable display areas;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the variable display of the pictures in each of the variable display areas when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the first operation means;
a means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result or granting a bonus (virtual game media) corresponding to the payout when a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an active position set in the plurality of variable display areas according to the lottery result by the lottery means;
A gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, at least a first gaming state (advantageous zone) and a second gaming state (normal zone) different from the first gaming state are provided,
A transition means (a function of executing a lottery process for transitioning to an advantageous zone and a first zone display process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is met;
A termination means (a function of executing a second section display process by the main control device 101) for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is met;
When the first gaming state is ended, a specific effect execution means (a function of executing an ending effect setting process and an ending effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) is configured to execute a specific effect (ending effect) corresponding to the end of the first gaming state by a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) over a plurality of games from before the end of the first gaming state;
A specific state means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that generates a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) when a predetermined specific condition (a second BB winning) is established;
Equipped with
The specific state is different from the first gaming state or a predetermined state (AT mode) before the specific state occurs in the first gaming state in terms of an increase rate of gaming media or an expected net increase per game,
The predetermined termination condition includes a predetermined termination condition in which the increase in the number of gaming media in the first gaming state (the number of increase/decrease in the advantageous zone MY) reaches an upper limit increase number (2,400),
The specific performance execution means includes a means for starting the specific performance (a function for executing a second ending performance by the display control device 81) when a predetermined start condition corresponding to the predetermined end condition is met (the timing for starting the ending performance is reached in a situation where the upper limit increase number is expected to be reached),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific means (a function to execute a display setting process at full stop and a display setting process during a bonus by a display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) that stops or interrupts the specific effect (second ending effect) that is currently being executed if the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect based on the fulfillment of the specified start condition.

In the above configuration, when the gaming state transitions to the first gaming state, the first gaming state ends when the increase in the number of gaming media in the first gaming state reaches the upper limit increase number. When the first gaming state ends, a specific effect corresponding to this is executed over multiple games from before the end of the first gaming state. This allows the player to recognize that the first gaming state is ending.

However, if a specific state is transitioned to while a specific effect is being executed (a state in which the increase rate of gaming media or the expected net increase per game differs from the first gaming state or the predetermined state in the first gaming state before the specific state occurred), the pace at which gaming media increase changes, and the actual end game of the first gaming state differs from the end game expected at the start of the specific effect. As a result, there is a risk that the first gaming state will not end for a long time even though the specific effect has been executed to the end, or that the first gaming state will end before the specific effect has been executed to the end. In this regard, with this configuration, if a transition to a specific state occurs while a specific effect is being executed, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted, thereby preventing the above-mentioned inconvenience and making it possible to effectively prevent player confusion caused by the specific effect not being synchronized with the first gaming state.

Feature H2. The first gaming state may transition to a special state (AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The second gaming state does not transition to the special state,
A gaming machine described in feature H1, characterized in that the specified state is the special state.

In the above configuration, a transition to a special state can occur while remaining in the first gaming state. This special state is advantageous for players with an advantage, and gaming media are likely to increase. Therefore, the predetermined termination condition for terminating the first gaming state (the increase in the number of gaming media in the first gaming state reaching the upper limit increase) is likely to be met while the special state is in progress, and specific effects are also likely to occur in the special state. Furthermore, if a transition to the specific state occurs while a specific effect is being executed in the special state, the actual end game of the first gaming state will differ from the end game expected at the start of the specific effect. This tendency becomes more pronounced the greater the difference in the increase rate of gaming media or the expected net increase per game between the special state and the specific state. In this regard, if a transition to the specific state occurs while a specific effect is being executed, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted, thereby effectively preventing the first gaming state (special state) from ending slowly even though the specific effect has been executed to its completion, or the first gaming state (special state) ending before the specific effect has been executed to its completion.

This feature may further include the configuration that "the specific state has a smaller increase rate of gaming media or a smaller expected net increase per game than the special state." In this case, the actual end game of the first gaming state was predicted at the start of the specific effect, and therefore will be delayed from the end game. This could result in the first gaming state (special state) not ending even though the specific effect has been played to the end. However, the configuration of feature H2 above makes it possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature H3. A first means as the specifying means;
A gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2, characterized in that it is provided with a second means for executing the specific effect after the specific state ends if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means.

In the above configuration, the special effect is executed after the special state ends, so even if the special effect is stopped or interrupted midway, the player can be properly notified that the first game state is ending.

This feature may further include a configuration in which "the specific state has a lower increase rate of gaming media or a lower expected net increase per game than the first gaming state or the predetermined state." In this case, a transition to the specific state will cause a delay in the ending game of the first gaming state, and applying feature H3 to such a configuration will effectively achieve the above-mentioned effect.

This feature may further include the following configurations: "comprises a grasping means for grasping the remaining increase up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state" and "the second means executes the specific effect for a number of games corresponding to the remaining increase grasped by the grasping means." In this case, the specific effect after the specific state can be ended in accordance with the timing of the end of the first gaming state that has changed due to the transition to the specific state, making it possible to suitably synchronize the specific effect with the first gaming state.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H3, wherein the second means is equipped with means for executing, as the specific effect to be executed after the specific state ends, an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect that was stopped or interrupted by the first means.

With the above configuration, the continuation of the stopped or interrupted special effect is executed as the special effect after the special state, making it possible to play the special effect to the end. For example, if the part of the special effect that the player particularly wants to see is set to the end of the special effect, the player will need to take care not to fulfill the specified condition in order to avoid the special effect being stopped or interrupted. This makes it difficult for the player to concentrate on the first game state and the special effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the continuation of the stopped or interrupted special effect is resumed after the specific state ends, so the special effect can be played to the end even if the specified condition is fulfilled during the special effect. This allows the player to play without being distracted by whether or not the specified condition is fulfilled, making it possible to create a configuration that is easy to play.

Furthermore, for example, when designing a special effect taking into account the possibility of it ending midway, the climax of the effect (the part that the gaming machine designer wants the player to see, or the part that is most impressive to the player) must be set in the beginning or middle of the special effect. In this case, the special effect is likely to have a tapering impression, making it difficult to design the effect in a way that will gain player support. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the climax is set at the end of the special effect, the implementation of that part cannot be halted due to cancellation or interruption, making it easier to design the special effect. In other words, not only is it easier for players to play, but it also contributes to reducing the design burden.

Feature H5: A grasping means for grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the specific state ends,
The gaming machine described in Feature H3 or Feature H4 is characterized in that the second means is provided with a means for executing the specific effect for a number of games corresponding to the remaining increase number grasped by the grasping means.

Depending on the length of the transition period to the special state, if a special effect is resumed halfway through after the end of the special state, the player may not understand what has begun, which could lead to confusion. In this regard, with this configuration, a new special effect is executed after the special state, making it easy for the player to understand and effectively reducing player confusion. Furthermore, when executing a new special effect after the special state, the remaining increase up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the special state is determined, and it is executed for the number of games corresponding to that remaining increase. This means that the special effect after the special state can be ended in accordance with the end timing of the first game state, which changed due to the transition to the special state, and the special effect and the first game state can be effectively synchronized.

When this feature is applied to feature H4 above, it may also be stated that "the specific states include a first specific state and a second specific state having a longer transition period than the first specific state, and the second means comprises: means for, if the first specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, executing an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect that was stopped or interrupted by the first means after the specific state has ended; and means for, if the second specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, executing a new specific effect after the specific state has ended." In this case, it is possible to switch between resuming the continuing specific effect or executing a new specific effect depending on the type of specific state (the length of the transition period to the specific state).

Feature H6. In the specific effect, a specific notification (such as a notification of "Congratulations" or "END") is made so that the player can recognize the end of the specific effect or the first gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any of features H1 to H5, characterized in that when the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect (second ending effect), the specific means cancels or interrupts the specific effect currently being executed so that the specific notification is not made.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made during a specific effect, allowing the player to recognize the end of the specific effect or the first gaming state. This specific notification allows the player to recognize that the specific effect or the first gaming state is ending. Furthermore, in this configuration, if a specific state occurs while a specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is stopped or interrupted so that the specific notification is not made during the specific effect being executed. This effectively prevents inconveniences such as the first gaming state not ending even though the specific effect has been executed to the end, or the first gaming state ending before the specific effect has been executed to the end.

When this feature is applied to feature H3 above, the "second means" may be defined as "second means for, when the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, executing the specific effect for the specific notification after the specific state has ended." With this configuration, even if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted due to a transition to a specific state, the player can be properly notified that the first gaming state is ending by the specific notification in the specific effect executed after the specific state.

Feature H7: The termination conditions include a first termination condition in which the number of executed games in the first gaming state (the number of advantageous zone games AG) reaches an upper limit number of games (1,500 games), and a second termination condition as the predetermined termination condition.
The terminating means terminates the first gaming state when any one of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied,
The specific effect execution means is configured to start the specific effect when a first start condition (a timing for starting the ending effect when it is expected that the upper limit number of games will be reached) corresponding to the first end condition is established or when a second start condition as the predetermined start condition is established;
A gaming machine described in any of features H1 to H6, characterized in that it is equipped with a third means (a function to execute a display setting process at full stop and a display setting process during a bonus by the display control device 81 relating to the sixth and seventh embodiments) to continue the specific display (first ending display) that is currently being executed if the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific display (first ending display) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition.

For example, if a configuration in which a transition to a specific state occurs during the execution of a specific effect always stops or pauses the specific effect, there is a risk that the specific effect will be frequently interrupted. In this regard, with the above configuration, if a transition to a specific state occurs during the execution of a specific effect that was started based on the establishment of a first start condition corresponding to a first end condition (the number of games executed in the first gaming state reaching the upper limit number of games), the specific effect will continue, making it possible to synchronize the specific effect with the first gaming state and reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H8. A gaming machine as described in Feature H7, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4705, S4604, and S4605 by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the specific state after the specific effect ends when the specific effect is continued by the third means and the specific effect ends during the specific state.

With the above configuration, if a transition to a specific state occurs while a specific effect is being executed and the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized, a predetermined effect (an effect corresponding to the specific state) will be executed after the specific effect ends, making it possible for the player to recognize that a transition to the specific state is in progress.

Feature H9. The termination conditions include a first termination condition in which the number of executed games in the first gaming state (the number of advantageous zone games AG) reaches an upper limit number of games (1,500 games), and a second termination condition as the predetermined termination condition,
The terminating means terminates the first gaming state when any one of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied,
a determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5104 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment) for determining whether or not to stop or suspend the specific effect when the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition;
The specifying means, when the determining means determines that the specific effect should be stopped or interrupted, stops or interrupts the specific effect being executed,
a remaining game number grasping means (a function of executing the processing of step S5101 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment) for grasping the remaining number of games up to the upper limit game number when the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition;
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the determination means makes the determination by referring to the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining game number grasping means.

Even if the second end condition is met before the first end condition before the transition to the specific state, the timing of the second end condition being met may be delayed due to the transition to the specific state, resulting in the order of the second and first end conditions being reversed, and the state may change so that the first end condition is met before the second end condition. With this configuration, when a transition to the specific state occurs during the execution of a specific effect based on the fulfillment of a predetermined start condition, the number of games remaining until the first end condition is met is referenced to determine whether to stop or interrupt the specific effect. This allows the specific effect to continue even in cases where a reversal occurs, making it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H10. A gaming machine according to Feature H9, wherein the determination means determines not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed (step S5102) if the number of remaining games determined by the remaining game number determination means is less than a predetermined number (a number equal to or less than the number of executed bonus games corresponding to the second BB state).

With the above configuration, if a specific state occurs during the execution of a specific effect based on the fulfillment of the second start condition, and the number of remaining games up to the upper limit is within a certain range, the specific effect can be continued without being stopped or interrupted. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H11. The gaming machine described in Feature H10, wherein the predetermined number is the number of games remaining up to the upper limit increase when the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect based on the fulfillment of the predetermined start condition, plus the increase in the number of games remaining up to the upper limit increase due to the specific state.

With the above configuration, if the state changes to one in which the first termination condition is met before the second termination condition is met, the currently running special effect can be continued without being stopped or interrupted. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the special effect is interrupted.

Feature H12. A gaming machine as described in Feature H10 or Feature H11, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than the expected number of games played in the specific state or an estimated value based on actual results.

With the above configuration, if a reversal occurs within the range of the specific state, i.e., if the first gaming state ends due to reaching the maximum number of games during the specific state, the specific effect can be continued. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H13: A fourth means (a function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) for continuing the specific effect being executed when the determination means determines that the specific effect being executed will not be stopped or interrupted;
When the specific effect is continued by the fourth means, a means for ending the continued specific effect in accordance with the first ending condition (a function for executing the processing of steps S5201 to S5206 by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to any one of features H9 to H12, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, if a special effect is continued due to a reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the special effect is changed to one that corresponds to the first end condition. In other words, the continued special effect is ended in accordance with the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games, making it possible to end the continued special effect in synchronization with the end of the first game state.

Feature H14: A fourth means (a function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) for continuing the specific effect being executed if the determination means determines not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed,
A gaming machine described in any of features H9 to H13, characterized in that if the specific presentation is continued by the fourth means, it is equipped with a means for executing a predetermined notification (such as a notification that suggests or instructs the player on the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games) that allows the player to recognize that the specific presentation corresponds to the first termination condition.

With the above configuration, if a special effect continues due to a reversal phenomenon, the player will be able to recognize that the special effect corresponds to the first ending condition, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent player confusion.

When this feature is applied to feature H13 above, it is possible to align the player's awareness of the predetermined notification with the timing of the end of the continued specific effect, which is expected to more effectively reduce player confusion.

Feature H15. When the specific effect (second ending effect) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, a means for executing a specific notification (such as a notification that suggests or indicates the number of remaining increases up to the upper limit increase number, or the number of remaining games converted from the remaining increase number) that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second ending condition;
a fourth means (a function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) for continuing the specific performance that is being performed when the determination means determines that the specific performance that is being performed should not be stopped or interrupted;
means for not executing the specific notification when the specific performance is continued by the fourth means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features H9 to H14, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, if the special effect continues due to a reversal phenomenon, the special notification that would allow the player to recognize that the special effect corresponds to the second end condition is not executed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the continued special effect corresponds to the second end condition, making it possible to effectively prevent player confusion.

Note that when this feature is applied to feature H13 above, it is expected that even if the continued specific effect is ended according to the remaining number of games up to the upper limit, it will be possible to effectively prevent player confusion. Furthermore, the "means for not executing the specific notification" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for not executing the specific notification during the execution of the continued specific effect."

Feature H16. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H15, wherein the expected net increase per game in the specific state is less than 0.5 or a negative value.

In the above configuration, when a transition to a specific state occurs, the change in the gaming medium will be a slight increase, no increase, or a decrease. In these cases, if a transition to a specific state occurs while a specific effect is being played, it is expected that the timing of the end of the first gaming state (the timing of the specified end condition or the second end condition being met) will be delayed. By applying any of the above features H1 to H15 to this configuration, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of inconveniences associated with the delay in the end timing.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A18, Features B1 to B16, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E18, Features F1 to F12, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H16, and Features I1 to I13, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination with each other to each of the above Features H1 to H16. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1. As a gaming state, at least a first gaming state (advantageous zone) and a second gaming state (normal zone) different from the first gaming state are provided,
A transition means (a function of executing a lottery process for transitioning to an advantageous zone and a first zone display process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is met;
A termination means (a function of executing a second section display process by the main control device 101) for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is met;
When the first gaming state is ended, a specific effect execution means (a function of executing an ending effect setting process and an ending effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) is configured to execute a specific effect (ending effect) corresponding to the end of the first gaming state by a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) over a plurality of games from before the end of the first gaming state;
When a predetermined condition (a second BB winning) is established during the execution of the specific effect, a continuation determination means (a function for executing a bonus effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) determines whether or not to continue the specific effect that is currently being executed;
A specific means (a function for executing a display setting process at the time of full stop and a display setting process during a bonus by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) for continuing the specific effect that is being executed when it is determined by the continuation determination means to continue, and for stopping or interrupting the specific effect that is being executed when it is determined by the continuation determination means not to continue;
Equipped with
As the termination conditions, a plurality of termination conditions are provided, including a first termination condition (the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches the upper limit number of games) and a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the number of increase/decrease in the advantageous zone MY reaches the upper limit number of increase),
The terminating means terminates the first gaming state when any one of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied,
The continuation determination means determines that the specific effect being executed will be continued if the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect was executed in accordance with the first termination condition, and determines that the specific effect being executed will not be continued if the specific effect was executed in accordance with the second termination condition.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined transition condition is met, the gaming state transitions to the first gaming state, and this first gaming state ends when a predetermined termination condition is met. When the first gaming state ends, a specific effect corresponding to this is executed over multiple games from before the end of the first gaming state. This allows the player to recognize that the first gaming state is ending.

In this configuration, this feature includes a continuation determination means that, when a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a special effect, determines whether to continue the currently executing special effect or to halt or interrupt it. The continuation determination means continues the currently executing special effect if the termination condition of the first gaming state that triggered the special effect is the first termination condition, and halts or interrupts the currently executing special effect if the termination condition of the first gaming state that triggered the special effect is the second termination condition. Here, since the specific effect is initiated based on the situation before the predetermined condition was met, for example, if the predetermined condition affects the timing of the termination of the first gaming state in relation to the termination condition of the first gaming state, there is a risk of disrupting synchronization between the specific effect and the timing of the termination of the first gaming state. In such cases, it is preferable to halt or interrupt the currently executing special effect to prevent player confusion. However, frequently halting or interrupting the special effect may result in frequent interruptions in the special effect, reducing its effectiveness. In this regard, this feature is configured to determine whether to stop or interrupt a specific effect in progress based on the relationship between the predetermined conditions that are met during the specific effect and the conditions for ending the first game state that triggered the specific effect. This makes it possible to minimize the impact of the predetermined conditions being met while preventing the specific effect from being interrupted excessively.

Feature I2. A gaming machine as described in Feature I1, configured so that when the predetermined condition is met, the number of games remaining until the second termination condition is met is increased.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met while a specific effect is being played, the number of games remaining until the second end condition is met is increased, delaying the timing of the end of the first gaming state. In such a case, the specific effect being played is stopped or interrupted, preventing the player from mistaking the timing of the end of the first gaming state due to the specific effect, minimizing the impact of the predetermined condition being met.

This feature can also be expressed as "When the predetermined condition is met, the number of games remaining until the first end condition is met is not increased, but the number of games remaining until the second end condition is met is increased."

Feature I3. A specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over multiple games when the predetermined condition is met;
a first means as the specifying means;
a second means for executing the specific effect after the specific state ends when the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means;
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the special effect is executed after the special state ends, so even if the special effect is stopped or interrupted midway, the player can be properly notified that the first game state is ending.

Feature I4. The gaming machine described in Feature I3, wherein the second means is equipped with means for executing, as the specific effect to be executed after the specific state ends, an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect that was stopped or interrupted by the first means.

With the above configuration, the continuation of the stopped or interrupted special effect is executed as the special effect after the special state, making it possible to play the special effect to the end. For example, if the part of the special effect that the player particularly wants to see is set to the end of the special effect, the player will need to take care not to fulfill the specified condition in order to avoid the special effect being stopped or interrupted. This makes it difficult for the player to concentrate on the first game state and the special effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the continuation of the stopped or interrupted special effect is resumed after the specific state ends, so the special effect can be played to the end even if the specified condition is fulfilled during the special effect. This allows the player to play without being distracted by whether or not the specified condition is fulfilled, making it possible to create a configuration that is easy to play.

Furthermore, for example, when designing a special effect taking into account the possibility of it ending midway, the climax of the effect (the part that the gaming machine designer wants the player to see, or the part that is most impressive to the player) must be set in the beginning or middle of the special effect. In this case, the special effect is likely to have a tapering impression, making it difficult to design the effect in a way that will gain player support. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the climax is set at the end of the special effect, the implementation of that part cannot be halted due to cancellation or interruption, making it easier to design the special effect. In other words, not only is it easier for players to play, but it also contributes to reducing the design burden.

Feature I5. When the specific effect is executed by the second means, a grasping means is provided for grasping the number of games remaining until the second ending condition is established,
The gaming machine described in feature I3 or feature I4 is characterized in that the second means is provided with a means for executing a new specific effect for a number of games corresponding to the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means.

Depending on the length of the transition period to the specific state, if a specific effect is resumed halfway through after the specific state ends, the player may not understand what has begun, which could lead to confusion. In this regard, with this configuration, a new specific effect is executed after the specific state, making it easy for the player to understand and effectively reducing player confusion. Furthermore, when executing a new specific effect after the specific state, the number of games remaining until the second end condition is met is determined, and the effect is executed for a number of games corresponding to that determined number of remaining games. This makes it possible to end the specific effect after the specific state in accordance with the end timing of the first game state, which changed due to the transition to the specific state, and effectively synchronize the specific effect with the first game state.

When applying this feature to feature I4 above, it may also be stated that "the specific states include a first specific state and a second specific state having a longer transition period than the first specific state, and the second means comprises: means for, if the first specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, executing an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect that was stopped or interrupted by the first means after the specific state has ended; and means for, if the second specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, executing a new specific effect after the specific state has ended." In this case, it is possible to switch between resuming the continuing specific effect or executing a new specific effect depending on the type of specific state (the length of the transition period to the specific state).

Feature I6. When the predetermined condition is met, the number of games remaining until the second ending condition is met is increased,
The continuation determination means includes second determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5104 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment) for determining whether or not to stop or suspend the specific effect being executed if the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect has been executed in response to the second termination condition;
a remaining game number grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S5101 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment) for grasping the remaining number of games until the first end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine described in any of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the second judgment means determines whether to stop or interrupt the specific effect currently being executed by referring to the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining game number grasping means.

Even if the second end condition is met before the first end condition before the specified condition is met, the timing of the second end condition being delayed when the specified condition is met may reverse the order of the second and first end conditions, resulting in the first end condition being met before the second end condition. With this configuration, whether to stop or interrupt the special effect is determined by referring to the number of games remaining until the first end condition is met when the specified condition is met. Therefore, even if the specified condition is met during the execution of a special effect corresponding to the second end condition, the special effect can continue if a reversal occurs, reducing the frequency with which the special effect is interrupted.

Feature I7. A gaming machine according to Feature I6, wherein the second determination means determines that the specific effect being executed will not be stopped or interrupted (step S5102) if the number of remaining games determined by the remaining game number determination means is less than a predetermined number (a number equal to or less than the number of executed bonus games corresponding to the second BB state).

With the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of a special effect corresponding to the second end condition, and the number of games remaining until the first end condition is met is within a certain range, the special effect can be continued without being stopped or interrupted. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the special effect is interrupted.

Feature I8. The gaming machine described in Feature I7, wherein the predetermined number is the number of games remaining until the second end condition is met if the predetermined condition is met during execution of the specific effect, plus the increase in the number of games remaining until the second end condition is met due to the predetermined condition.

With the above configuration, if the state changes to one in which the first termination condition is met before the second termination condition is met, the currently running special effect can be continued without being stopped or interrupted. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the special effect is interrupted.

Feature I9. When the predetermined condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) is provided to transition to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over multiple games,
A gaming machine described in feature I7 or feature I8, characterized in that the predetermined number is a number equal to or less than the expected value of the number of games executed in the specific state or an estimated value based on actual results.

With the above configuration, if a reversal occurs within the range of the specific state, i.e., if the first gaming state ends due to reaching the maximum number of games during the specific state, the specific effect can be continued. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I10. The specifying means continues the specific effect being executed when the second determination means determines that the specific effect being executed will not be stopped or interrupted (a function of executing the processing of step S5104 by the display control device 81),
A gaming machine described in any of features I6 to I9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5201 to S5206 by the display control device 81) for terminating the continued specific effect in accordance with the first termination condition when the specific effect is continued based on the second judgment means determining that the specific effect being executed will not be stopped or interrupted.

In the above configuration, if a special effect is continued due to a reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the special effect is changed to one that corresponds to the first end condition. In other words, the continued special effect is ended according to the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games, making it possible to synchronize the special effect with the first game state.

Feature I11. The specifying means continues the specific effect being executed when the second determination means determines that the specific effect being executed will not be stopped or interrupted (a function of executing the processing of step S5104 by the display control device 81),
A gaming machine described in any of features I6 to I10, characterized in that if the specific effect is continued based on the second judgment means determining that the specific effect being executed will not be stopped or interrupted, it is equipped with a means for executing a predetermined notification (such as a notification that suggests or instructs the player on the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games) that allows the player to recognize that the continued specific effect corresponds to the first termination condition.

With the above configuration, if a special effect continues due to a reversal phenomenon, the player will be able to recognize that the special effect corresponds to the first ending condition, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent player confusion.

When this feature is applied to feature I10 above, it is possible to align the player's awareness of the predetermined notification with the timing of the end of the continued specific effect, which is expected to more effectively reduce player confusion.

Feature I12. When the specific effect is executed in response to the second termination condition, a means is provided for executing a specific notification (such as a notification that suggests or indicates the number of remaining increases up to the upper limit increase number, or the number of remaining games converted from the remaining increase number) that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second termination condition,
The specifying means continues the specific performance being executed when the second determination means determines that the specific performance being executed will not be stopped or interrupted (a function of executing the processing of step S5104 by the display control device 81),
A gaming machine described in any of features I6 to I11, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for not executing the specific notification if the specific effect is continued based on the second judgment means determining that the specific effect currently being executed will not be stopped or interrupted.

In the above configuration, if the special effect continues due to a reversal phenomenon, the special notification that would allow the player to recognize that the special effect corresponds to the second end condition is not executed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the continued special effect corresponds to the second end condition, making it possible to effectively prevent player confusion.

When this feature is applied to feature I10 above, it is expected that the effect of effectively preventing player confusion can be achieved even if the continued specific effect is ended according to the remaining number of games up to the upper limit. Furthermore, the "means for not executing the specific notification" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for not executing the specific notification during the execution of the continued specific effect."

Feature I13. A specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions to a specific state (a bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over multiple games when the predetermined condition is met;
A gaming machine described in any of features I1 to I12, characterized in that if the specific effect is continued by the specification means and the specific effect ends during the specific state, after the specific effect ends, a means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the specific state (a function for executing the processing of steps S4705, S4604, and S4605 by the display control device 81).

With the above configuration, if a transition to a specific state occurs while a specific effect is being executed and the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized, a predetermined effect (an effect corresponding to the specific state) will be executed after the specific effect ends, making it possible for the player to recognize that a transition to the specific state is in progress.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above features I1 to I13: features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H16, and features I1 to I13. It is also possible to apply some or all of the technical ideas in combination. When applying the technical ideas in combination, they may be combined across feature groups.

In addition, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group I described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to I individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a designated gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and which awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a designated passage section of each of the gaming components. When applying each of the above features to a pachinko gaming machine, a game (1 game) related to each feature can be considered a variation (1 variation).

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10...slot machine, 32...reels, 41...start lever, 42-44...stop switches, 65...auxiliary display unit, 81...display control device, 101...main control device.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a first operating means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a second operating means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect to be executed in multiple games when a specific opportunity is established;
a specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect by a predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means;
a specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification when the specific opportunity is established;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a first game corresponding to the execution of an operation of a first mode when an operation of the first mode is executed , and is configured to be capable of executing a second game corresponding to the execution of an operation of a second mode different from the first mode when an operation of the second mode is executed ,
It is possible to set the specific effect to be executed when the specific trigger is established in a situation where the first game is played,
a specifying means for suspending the specific effect being executed in the second game or a game subsequent to the second game when the operation of the second mode is executed during execution of the specific effect;
The specific notification can be executed by a predetermined notification means different from the predetermined performance means,
In a game in which the specific effect is interrupted by the specific means based on the execution of the operation of the second mode during the execution of the specific effect and the specific notification, the specific notification can be continued,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be continued in a game in which the interruption of the specific effect is lifted after the specific effect is interrupted and the specific notification is continued.